Home

PCWAY User`s Manual, ARCT1F392E-7

Contents

1. A Available N A Not available 2 1 3 Explanation on the Event Event V The event is the relay which operates in the internal part of PCWAY independent to the PLC The notation method which exists with PCWAY is from Concerning V VO to V99F In all 1600 the notation method is the same as the PLC relay the first digit under is the hexadecimal This is used with the internal processing and does not take place at the same time as the PLC Summary Relay READ WRITE Use as Trigger V Event A A A A Available SSS SSS 2 5 2 1 4 Explanation on the Trigger and the informing Definition of the Trigger With PCWAY it is possible to display the PLC data on to the Microsoft Excel sheet Such visual performances are possible Also it is possible to perform internal matters such as accumulating data into the file or the playing of the sound The relay and the event which is used to start such internal tasks are called the trigger Only the relay relay link area M and the event V can be registered as the trigger When this relay link area M or the event V has changed from OFF gt ON each of the internal processing will be started ag eNote e The event V can be used as the trigger independent to the network type e The Relay link area M used as the trigger varies by the network type e When using the MEWNET H Link board It is necessary to adapt to the rela
2. e The following example describes the downloading of the data using PCWAYsubDownLoad Execute during the running of the monitor If Application DisplayNotelndicator False Then Download the data which has been entered in to the B15 cell Range B15 Select Select the cell Call Application Run PCWAYsubDownLoad Download Data End If e The next example describes the back upping of the data using PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType Dim strFileName As String Dim strBuffer As String strFileName TestBackup strBuffer Application Run PCWAYfncFileSaveNameT ype strFileName Precautions concerning usage With PCWAY the following procedures are registered When the properties of the procedures below are changed then the PCWAY Add In program might not operate correctly Please be careful Procedure various types of settings With Application OnSheetActivate PCWAYsubAutoSheet Sheet activate On DoubleClick PC WAYsubDoubleClick Double click OnData PCWAYsubDDEAddinEvents DDE Link DisplayNotelndicator True Memo mark ActiveCell NoteText MEW Memo ScreenUpdating True Screen display renewal End With Event procedure relation function e Sheet data notice processing Sub PCWAYsubAutoSheet e Double click processing Sub PCWAYsubDoubleClick e Cell input processing Sub PCWAYsubCellEntry e DDE Event arrival of the post processing Sub PCWAYsubD
3. Pulse Width Settings Retry oN v Relay ON Time T OOmsec Interval fs x min Work Folder C Program Files PCWAY v Drive W Enter the correct settings for the COM Port Baud Rate Data Length Stop Bit and Parity parameters and enter setting for the Timeout and Public Line Timeout parameters Check Pulse if a dial type line is being used no check is necessary if a Tone push type line is being used and enter a setting for the AT command For detailed information refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences Communication Setting Operation Preferences X Network type fayey t v COM port COM1 f Cancel Baud rate 3600 x bps Initialize Datalengh C 7bits 8bits Help m Stop bit 14 bit f 2bits m Parity Non C Odd C Even m Dial mode C Pulse Tone C Others ATOT Time out fio x sec Public Line Time out Jeo 7 sec Modem Command 4T Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 4 H eWith regard to the PLC information for the various regions connected to the network if there are 65 or more regions place a check mark by Over 65 Regions under Number of Regions Over 65 Regions QO and click on EF Operation Preferences x File E Settings C Help H Se St O O OOO PC Type r Refresh Interval Settings PC Type IBM PC AT z Display Data 1 OOmsec Network Relay Link 1 O0msec Net Type MODEM Over 65 Regions
4. Retry ON Y Relay ON Time 1 OOmsec Interval 5 v min Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY z Drive W When the PLC dials the phone number and informs of the error PCWAY reacts by performing the processes given below 1 Recognizes RING When the PLC calls up PCWAY receives the RING After the RING is received it waits for CONNECT 2 Receives CONNECT With the reception of CONNECT it recognizes the reception of an error 3 Reads the read register of node number 1 Reads three words of the PLC data at the read register set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions O button at the Operation Preferences dialog box At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word Stores the decimal value 1 K1 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 KO a nore The processes afterward differ depending on the Operation Preferences dialog box settings If the serial ports for the modem and error reception differ after the above read register is read the event set in the 2nd word of the read register is turned on the processing for the file set to be triggered by that event number is executed and the connection is severed at the serial port on the error re
5. 1 Fieno fi File No Reference 2 gt Generation Generation 1 3 gt Display Method Display All Records At Once x 4 Update Method update File Contents Each Time IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 File No Set the number for File Master When you are sure of the number to choose by left clicking ___ Flee Reference button the registering screen will be displayed Select the file number which you will use and finish 2 Generation Left click within Generation and select the desired generation 3 Display Method Specify the method on account of reading the file If you have selected Display All Records At Once All of the records will be read Display Specified Record Specifies from which record to start reading and also how many records to read When Display Method is set to Display Specified Record Start Record Input which record to start reading from No of Records Input how many records to read in all 4 Update Method Select whether to redisplay the currently displayed data contents when the file data has been updated Update File Contents Each Time Performs the redisplaying if the file data is updated Do Not Update The displaying will remain as it is even if the file data has been updated ee eee rere ener eee ee 5 7 5 1 1 4 Event Cell Settings 2 xi p Target Attribute Relay Read Only Register e pie Data C
6. Item Explanations 1 No Possible to register from 1 to 100 If a comment has been inputted the comment will be displayed after the 2 Comment Input comment up to 16 characters 3 Data value Possible to register the value up to 0 to 4096 4 Message Possible to register the characters up to 32 characters 5 Character input Input the character of Message 6 Edit display color Specify the character color and the background color of what has been inputted at Message 7 Background color Specify whether or not to have the background color Menu bar e File Save Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format When you have registered previously at Message at the Cell Settings dialog box Select current No and finish Displays the currently selected number at No of Cell Settings and finishes Exit Finish the registering procedures e Edit E Add Message No A One number is added Note that only up to 100 numbers can be added Delete Message No D One number is deleted Note that the number which you have registered last is deleted Registering procedures 1 When registering anew 1 This is about the adding method of the number of No To add a number go to the menu bar to Edit E gt Add Message No A By selecting Add Message No A the number is added as a No option However you must note that the overall registerable numbe
7. Manual No Date Desceiption of changes ARCT1F392E Feb 2004 First Edition ARCT1F392E 2 Oct 2005 Second Edition ARCT1F392E 3 Jun 2007 3rd Edition ARCT1F392E 4 Sep 2009 4th Edition ARCT1F392E 5 Sep 2009 5th Edition ARCT1F392E 6 May 2009 6th Edition ARCT1F392E 7 Jul 2013 7th Edition Please contact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd E Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan E Telephone 81 568 33 7861 W Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic net id pidsx global About our sale network please visit our website Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd 2013 July 2013 PRINTED IN JAPAN ARCT1F392E 7
8. e Set the PLC which will call up as node1 when there is only one PLC ina remote area or when connected to C NET using the C NET adapter e Place a check mark at Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C when the PLC of a remote area wants to access to other PLCs of other stations situated at the same layer in the condition when it is attached to MEWNET H link Unit Go to this from the Operation Preferences menubar Setting pull down menu and select Option The Error Reception function at Operation Preferences can be used with any network PCWAY is based on at that moment eae during the C NET RS232C connection it is not possible to use the same serial a number 3 18 Setting Operation Preferences eRun Operation Preferences and set the information introduced below Communication Place a check mark by Receive under Error Reception and click on the esredngs ta button File F Settings C Help H pee Se PC Type m Refresh Interval Settings PC Type Display Data 1 OOmsec Netvork Relay Link 1 O00msec Net Type MODEM File Processing 1 OOmsec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 O00msec y Permit the M Receive ESET RE Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 100 a 0 Communication a Settings A Fora Entire Range Number of regions I Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 m Timeout Settings Error Reception
9. Executing Message Input the message to be displayed during the file processing Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedure Set whether or not to perform the processing directly from the overview window figure below Click the box which is on the left side of No If there is a check mark the processing will be performed Concerning on how to do each of the settings first choose the row for the number which you would like to register By left clicking the Details command button the details window of File Trigger will be displayed Do the necessary settings aS File Trigger x File F Help H peoo qiio Trigger C NET No Event Executing Message woot nuwnb won Cam BPRePRPRP RPP PRP RP BP RPP PPP J Details D e Details window 1 Place a check mark at Execute when executing the registered matters File Trigger x No a Execute J Yes Trigger jx i o Informing Relay M Notify Node p Relay JR 0 Informing Event NM Notify v L Executing Message PageUp u Pagedown D Heip 2 Do the settings when to start file processing Left click Trigger and select Input the number of the relay link or the event a
10. Save Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format ties you have registered at File No Reference command button at the Cell Settings dilog box or at Specify corresponding file at the File Processing dialog box Select current No and finish L Displays the currently selected number at File No of the Cell Settings dialog box or at the File No at the File Processing dialog box and then finishes Save and Exit E Saves and then finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures e Edit E Paste saved contents P Pastes the memorized contents at registered contents copy The file name will also be pasted therefore change the file name Copy saved contents C Memorizes the contents of the currently displayed file number Delete saved contents D Deletes the contents of the currently displayed file number Delete File K Instead of deleting the registered contents since the file processing will be executed with PCWAY the file data which has been made will be deleted This file of the File Master registering only will be deleted Registering procedures e File base setting Basic settings for the file which you will create File base setting 1 File No ls Comment fC O 2 File name 3 Record quantity 1 Write node Insert at beginning of file vje 5 5 Display renewal event VNo 1 File No Select the file number w
11. Specified Day 3 Set the device which you will turn ON Select Node Device and input the device number GE weekly Timer No Execute Specified Time Specified Day Node Device Output Format Comments PageUp U PageDown D 4 Select either Pulse or Level at Output Format However when the device is V event only Level can be specified GE weekly Timer Te No Execute Specified Time Specified Day Node Device Output Format Comments PageUp U PageDown D v Yes Si foo 7 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu J Fri Sat Sun 6 69 5 Input a simple comment for the registered execution 6 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 10 Interval Timer e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Interval Timer T _ e Click Turn the bit device to ON at a certain interval with pulse or level kan Interval Timer wow olan in b Ww WN Be PRRPRPRHE EH Anon bp wWwNnNe 18 Oo PRPRRPRPRPRP RPP BPP PPP PPP ee H ia Item explanations 1 Execute Select whether to execute the chosen No or not 2 Interval Select the interval o
12. a11 settings A Item Explanations e Details Modem Support No 1 1 gt Execute J Yes 2 gt C NET No a Browse W 34 gt Connection No 1 Browse P 4 Single Trigger M Yes v foo 5 ongoing Trigger V Yes y o 6 Limited Time V None 0 min 7 Tel No FC O 8 gt Informing Relay IV Notify r gt o Q gt Informing Event V Notify Vv foo 10 gt Comments CSSS S PageUp U PageDown D 1 Execute Select whether to execute the selected No or not 2 C NET No The C NET No will be displayed This C NET No is the same as the Modem No With the Browse button the C NET Settings dialog box will be displayed It is possible to check or set the setting contents Concerning on the registering details 6 11 C NET Settings 3 Connection No The number set at Connection No will be displayed This Connection No is the same as the Modem No With the Browse button the Connection No dialog box will be displayed It is possible to check and set the setting contents Concerning on the registering details 6 16 Connection No 4 Single Trigger When this trigger is turned ON it rings up the phone number of Tel No and connects the lines checks the ON OFF of the relay link area and the event which has been set at C NET No and then performs the internal processing such as file processing and the automatic starting of the macro refreshes
13. bx Specify the text and the color to be displayed when RO is on and when it is off under No 1 in the list in Character Change S QE selection C Character input Edit display color Background color Yes No Select character color EEEE an background color BEES TT tut This Select No is changeable by clicking the buttons of the numbers under No which is located on the very left side of the Character Change dialog box The registered contents at Character Change can also be used at the other Cell Settings M EXAMPLE e Register setting No 1 The value of the DTO data register is shown divided by 10 To multiply the value by 10 for operation and write it to the PLC enter the settings shown below Target Attribute C Relay Read Only Register File Data G Readjwrite C Event Connection C Connection Settings write Only Node No fi X Device Code for Data Register ba Device No fo Display Method ium Numeric Value X No of Words fi X Operation Formula No fi X Specify X 10 in the Read column and X 10 in the ae m i Write column under No 1 of the Operation IV Next Time Open On Double click Formula f Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H Comment Read x 10 Write x10 vv To place upper and lower limits on the value used for the operation enter values in the MIN and MAX
14. 0 ed jas fis __ e then OFF Saas sai j J el E peee Item Explanations 1 No Possible to register from 1 to 100 When you have registered from the Character Change at Cell Settings Select the number by clicking at No Select No Displays the currently selected number Clears the number which has been selected at Clear Selection 2 When On Input the character which you will have displayed when the bit device is ON within 16 characters 3 When OFF Input the character which you will have displayed when the bit device is OFF within 16 characters 4 Character Input Input the character of When ON When OFF 5 Edit Display Color Specify the character color and the background color of When ON When OFF 6 Background Color Specify whether to have or not the background color Menu bar e File Save Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format When you have registered from the Character Change at Cell Settings Select current No and finish Displays the currently selected No at No of Cell Settings and finishes Exit Finish registering procedures Registering procedures 1 When registering anew 1 Input the character in the When ON column for the number you would like to register By left clicking When ON column of the number which you will input this will be high lighted in whit
15. e Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Ethernet Remote e Click ey Ethernet Remote x Destin Destination Name Sing Ongo Timi eT taw Communi c 4 w OJAN A U NE 10 vo vo None ET LAN 10 il vo vo None ET LAN 10 12 vo vo None ET LAN 10 13 vo vo None ET LAN 10 14 vo vo None ET LAN 10 15 vo vo None ET LAN 10 16 vo vo None ET LAN 10 1 vo vo None ET LAN 10 18 vo vo None ET LAN 10 wo vo None ET LAN 10 al ALL Seveings A Item Explanations aod N e Details window Hj Ethernet Remote 1x 1 gt Destination St No fn 2 Execute J Yes 3 p destination Name Ct 4 gt Single Trigger IV Yes y o 5 gt Ongoing Trigger IV Yes y o 6 Limited Time IV None oo Min 7 P ET LAN Unit V Use 8 Timeout Communication zo Sec Connection 60 Y sec Q gt Destination IP address O 0r 0 0 10 Destination port No 1025 1025 32767 L z 0 1025 32767 12 Source St No Jes 13 Informing Relay M Notify Ir gt o 14 gt Informing Event M Notify y o healed ie ia PageUp iU PageDown iD Help H Destination St No Fixed destination station number is displayed If check the Yes check box at the Execute for each node number these node numbers must be selected in Con
16. 01 CR LF 11 ETX 6 Start code 0 1 0 No STX STX 3 System Register 414 K0 19200bps Baud Rate K1 9600bps K2 4800bps K3 2400bps K4 1200bps K5 600bps K6 300bps 4 System Register 415 K1 K32 Unit No Timeout At the Communication Setting Operation Preferences dialog box specify C NET RS232C Then at Timeout then specify the expiration time of the communication time with your PLC Set with each 1 second within the 1 to 60 second range Parameter for automatic setting If you have placed a check mark at the Baud Rate Data Length and Parity check boxes If the upper items of which you have specified and the PLC communication settings are not the same this is automatically adjusted at the point of the starting of PCWAY No Connection The PLC will not be connected Modem Set to the same communication conditions with the PLCs which are located in distant regions Timeout At the Communication Setting Operation Preferences dialog box specify MODEM Then at Timeout then specify the expiration time of the communication time with your PLC Set with each 1 second within the 1 to 60 second range Dial Mode Specify the type of the line to be connected Please you can input Dial Mode of your modem when you selected Others Public Line Timeout Set the waiting time for the line to be connected Modem Init Command AT command ATV1E0S0 1S2 43 V1 Indica
17. 2147483648 2147483647 range Real Num DOUBLE 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 RANGE Char storable up to 32 characters this is not UNICODE Record A group one horizontal row in the previous page of the fields data items discussed in the previous page is called a record Data can be saved in units of one record one horizontal row in the previous page at a time and numerous records can be compiled to form a file Up to 30 000 records cases can be saved File The accumulation of data made up of fields and records will make up a file File name it is always necessary to give your file a name With PCWAY it is possible to register 600 types of these files Since the file is saved in the text format CSV format it is possible to open the file at a different application besides Microsoft Excel File Generation With PCWAY it is possible to use 3 generation files of different extensions for one file For instance when you have registered a file named TEST it is possible to use 3 generation files with PCWAY such as TEST 1 TEST 2 and TEST 3 TEST 1 named Generation 1 TEST 2 named Generation 2 TEST 3 named Generation 3 Only the Generation 1 TEST 1 file is capable of constantly saving the PLC information The Generation 2 TEST 2 and Generation 3 TEST 3 file are used to backup the Generation 1 TEST 1 file File Processing The processing for the file is called file processing File processing is t
18. 90 999 Next Connection Time 90 gece 9 999 With this Read Register the first 3 words of the PLC data are read PCWAY reads the PLC with the node number 1 for the Read Register However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word The Modem Support register number is stored as a decimal number if the register number is 5 store K5 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 KO The data value stored in the 2nd word becomes the event number and that event is set to ON Furthermore only the files that are triggered by that event are executed Once they are completed the connection is severed immediately You cannot inform the PLC of the connection The registering of the informing relay becomes invalid When there are 65 or more PLCs connected Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the Over 65 Regions 9 button to display the MODEM O
19. 99 x 16 15 1599 only the lower one digit is hexadecimal Reads the contents of all events V short sEvent 1600 int ilndex Reads the contents of all events V PCWAYapiEventAllRead sEvent Changes the arrangement number to 19E iIndex 19 16 E A 10 if 1 sEvent ilndex MessageBox NULL V19E is on EVENT MB_Ok else MessageBox NULL V19E is off EVENT MB_OK e Applicable information Microsoft Visual C Version 6 0 or later Header Declared within pcwayapi h Import library Uses w_merdpc lib DLL Uses w_mcrdpc dll Since it is using the same DLL as PCWAY make sure to use the program that uses this function from the same directory that PCWAY is executed from The function is not for a VB function 7 5 Functions Upgraded in PCWAY Ver 2 5 7 5 1 PCWAY macro auto record e Recording new macros in Microsoft Excel From the menu bar select Tools gt Macro gt Record New Macro PCWAY macros are automatically recorded in the Microsoft Excel macro using shortcut keys as shown below Recorded macros and shortcut keys Run PCWAY Ctrl Shift B Exit PCWAY Ctrl Shift C Start Monitor Ctrl Shift D Stop Monitor Ctrl Shift E Download Data Ctrl Shift G Update All Sheet Data Ctrl Shift H Update Active Sheet Data Ctrl Shift Save Excel File Ctrl E Save HTML File Ctrl M M EXAMPLE When Cirl Shift B Ctrl Shift D
20. Argument 3 Device Code WR WL DT SV EV LD FL IC Argument 4 Device No If you access IC card please design by Hexadecimal Argument 5 File Register FL Bank No FL in FP2SH 0 1 2 Else 1 Argument6_ Number of words Argument 7 Data value Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Others e Upload data from continuous area in PLC Except Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEX Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As String Argument 5 As Integer Argument 6 As Long As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEX2 Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As String Argument 5 As Integer Argument 6 As Long As Long Argument 1 Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument 4 Argument 5 Argument 6 Return Value COM Port No 1 5 GT USB 0 Specify 1 to use the same port as PCWAY or USB PLC Station No Device Code WR WL DT SV EV LD FL IC Device No If you access IC card please design by Hexadecimal File Register FL Bank No FL in FP2SH 0 1 2 Else 1 Number of words 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Others This function only store the data value in internal memory of PCWAY L
21. At C NET No the number which has been registered at C NET Settings will be displayed With the Browse command button the C NET Settings dialog box will be displayed With this it is possible to confirm the registered contents or to simply register here For further information on the registering 6 11 C NET Settings S Modem Support saa Ve E ii i lt I 3 For the Connection No the number which has been registered at the Connection No dialog box will be displayed After clicking the Browse command button the Connection No dialog box will be displayed With this set the node numbers which will be watched in accordance to the PLC network used at distant regions For further information on the registering 6 16 Connection No Modem Support No i Node Execute C NET No Ly Browse W Connection No Dy Browse P k Single Trigger V Yes y o Ongoing Trigger MV Yes y Joo 3 Limited Time V None 0 min Tel No Poo Informing Relay M Notify Jr H oj Informing Event V Notify y o Comments OoOo O PageUp U PageDown D Help H 4 Set the Single Trigger When this trigger is turned to ON the registered telephone number will be rung up the line will be connected and then the line will be cut off automatically 5 Set the ongoing Trigger When this trigger turns to ON the registered telephone number will be rung up and the line will be connected The line wi
22. Cell Settings S and click this option The dialog box for Cell Settings can be displayed by any of the three ways above For more details on the procedures of Cell Settings please refer to 4 1 2 Setting the cell information Concerning on more setting refer to 5 1 Cell Settings Target r ttribute Relay Read Only F Register Cr File Data Read Write Event C Connection C wr Connection Settings Ne Node No fi Device Code p External Input Se Device No fo Character Change No fi Rd Character Change IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 4 Run PCWAY When the necessary settings for the cell information has been completed left click the Run PCWAY ag eNote e When hroway has not appeared onto the task bar under the screen this means that PCWAY has not been executed Furthermore if PCWAY has not been executed the communication with the PLC will not be possible later on e If there appears an error sign during the running of PCWAY left click the Exit PCWAY f and end the PCWAY program Next left click the Operation Preferences a and execute the settings reconfirm the communication conditions with the PLC and re do the settings ul After this left click the Run POWAY once again 5 Start the monitoring Left click the Start monitor The values of the PLC will be displayed on to the cell where the information settings
23. Check Pulse if a dial type line is being used no check is necessary if a Tone push type line is being used and enter a setting for the Modem Init command AT command Place a check mark by Over 65 Regions under Number of Regions If this check mark is not entered the Over 65 Regions button will not be displayed To set conditions for connections click on the Over 65 Regions button For information on the contents of settings refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences Enter settings for the Over 65 Regions and Connection No settings Settings for reception from the PLC Boot Operation Preferences and specify the following information Place a check mark by Receive under Network Then click onthe Jaen Se button and enter the reception settings For detailed information refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences 3 6 Not Connect m Select not Connect at Net Type This can only handle Event V and the gathered file data Communication Setting Operation Prefer C NET RS232C MODEM MEWNET H No Connectio Ethemet Local Ethernet Remote jou__ oa C Program Files PCWAY 3 7 Error Reception Besides the function operation of the modem which enables PCWAY to call up PLCs in remotely located regions there exists a function which enables the PLC to call up PCWAY and inform PCWAY of any errors Ga eNote When calling PCWAY from the PLC make sure to
24. Help H ee No Interval Node Device Format Comments No ml Execute V Yes Interval 15ec Node Device voy i Output Format Comments PageUp U PageDown D By using together Interval Timer and the File Processing it is possible to perform the file processing at a certain interval By using together Interval Timer with the Auto Macro startup it is possible to start the macro at a certain interval Starting time of a certain interval is 0 00 a m For example If it s 1min of up settings VO is ON at 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 23 59 For example If up settings is 1Hour VO is ON at 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 23 00 4 5 Playing the Sound 4 5 1 Procedures of the sound playing The playing of the sound file will be started by the trigger turning to ON This trigger is equivalent to the relay link relay M or the event V By determining the timing of when to turn ON the trigger it is possible to perform the sound playing at various timings For example e Perform the sound playing at a certain interval by setting Interval Timer which enables the turning ON of the event at a certain interval e Perform the sound playing at the specified time of the specified day of the week by setting Weekly Timer which enables the turning on of the event at a specified time of a specified day of the week e Create a program which will turn on
25. Microsoft Visual C Version 6 0 or later Header Declared within pcwayapi h Import library Uses w_merdpc lib DLL Uses w_mcrdpc dll Since it is using the same DLL as PCWAY make sure to use the program that uses this function from the same directory that PCWAY is executed from 7 4 2 Obtaining the Status of the Specified Event Number VB Function PCWAYapiEventRead e Function Obtain the status of the specified event number e Construction PCWAYapiEventRead strEventNo e Configuration The PCWAYapiEventRead function construction is made up of the arguments given below strEventNo Specifies the character string of the event number Insert NULL Chr 0 at the end of the specified event number e Return value When the event turns on 1 is returned and when it turns off 0 is returned If an event number that does not exist is specified for the argument 1 is returned e Explanation Reads the status of event 19E V19E Declare Function MyAppGetEventState Lib W_MCRDPC dlIl Alias PCWAYapiEventRead ByVal strEventNo As String As Integer Sub Macro1 Dim IntEventState As Integer Reads status of V19E IntEventState MyAppGetEventState 19E amp Chr 0 If 1 IntEventState Then MsgBox V19E is on Else If 0 IntEventState Then MsgBox V19E is off Else An error results if the return value is anything other than 1 or 0 MsgBox The event number specified at the argument is invalid End If End Sub e
26. Only Read Only can be selected for the file data 5 1 1 Setting method 5 1 1 1 Relay Target Attribute C Read Only Relay C Register C File Data Event Connection C wr Connection Settings gerea o 1 Node No fi X 2 Device Code ly External Output x 3 Device No fo 4 operation Method Level Operation 5 character Change No fi F Character Change IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 Node No Select the node number from 0 to 254 a eNote When Write Only has been specified before as the attribute then it is possible to select All nodes This enables the changing of the status all at once in accordance to all of the currently connected PLC s during the operating and the downloading 2 Device code Left click within Device Code and select the device code which you will use anorte When you have selected M Relay link area at Device Code e If MODEM is selected under Network Type for the Network menu item under Operation Preferences a C NET No 1 to 64 should be specified for 1 Node No e If anything other than MODEM is selected under Network Type for the Network menu item under Operation Preferences always set 1 for 1 Node No 3 Device No Input the device number When you have selected Read Write or Write Only at the Attribute 4 Operation method Select from Level Operation Pulse Operatio
27. Protect gt MEW and save this Gg eNote If you do not input the above matters the displayings will not be updated although the PLC relay or the register contents might be changed Chapter 6 Registering Module 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences e Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Operation Preferences D e Click E R Operation Preferences 6 2 7 3 4 8 j S att Item Explanations 1 PC Type ePC Type By clicking within PC Type IBM PC AT will be displayed 2 Network e NET Type Click the button and at the dialog box of which you have entered select at the Network Type drop down list from the followings Communication Setting Operation Preferences x M EWN ET H TGE C NET RS232C Petes No Connection ermet Remote MODEM Ethernet Local Ethernet Remote USB 6 2 Network Type If you have not selected MODEM Ethernet Remote at this drop down list box then you must specify the PLC node number of which you will connect to By clicking the cti e E button the Connection No dialog box is displayed With this place a check mark for the node number which you wish to connect File E Help H Comment Check node number you want to connect BH d ss 8 BS 8 BB Be om op og 8 8 B HB 8 r EM 8 8 8 8 BB Bp BB E con lect cen loca loa econ feces lage foe s a0 aus mS as aay EES aot eazy EES las Sif szJ saf sas
28. Relay ON Time 1 OOmsec j 7 J a Timeout fio x sec Public Line Time out Jeo z sec Modem Command 4T Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 x Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY There are two types of connections ongoing connection where connection is maintained until it is severed off and single connection where connection is automatically severed after all the remote PLCs are scanned once Also you can have the single connection performed all registered remote regions in rotation Connection at the phone line is initiated when the specified event V turns ON e Itis also possible to report errors to PCWAY from remote PLCs using public phone lines This function can be used even if the PCWAY network type is not set to MODEM i e MEWNET H or C NET RS232C However if the network type is C NET RS232C then two or more COM ports are required Place a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the D button Perform the required communication settings at the dialog box that appears E H Operation Preferences Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error EG IBM PC AT 1 C Program Files PCWAY The node number for the remote PLC that will inform PCWAY of the error dial the phone is restricted to 1 e Using the public phone lines it is possible to connect to PCWAY from remote PLCs This basic functioning is opposite to that when
29. S With either of the methods the displaying of the Cell Settings is possible For further information on Cell Settings refer to 5 1 Cell Settings J s NoTe If you go from the Operation Preferences menu bar gt Settings and select Meee the following dialog box will appear onto the screen IV ON OFF confirmation message box V PCWAY menubar visible V PCWAY toolbar visible Sheet data no refresh mode necessary to compile in Use Link unit No when connection by RS2Z32C Communication with the setting unit no of the Ethernet connection E Monitoring Command of MEWTOCOL is not used emee mwan The Cell Settings dialog box will not be displayed onto the screen later on when you double click this unless there is a check mark at the Double click for cell settings first at the Operation Preferences dialog box M EXAMPLE e Relay sett ing When wishing to display and operate the RO status of the internal relay do the same settings as the figure below al arge attribute Relay Read Only Register Sroa ReadjWrite C Event Connection C Write Only C Connection Settings Node No Device Code Device No Operation Method Character Change No fa Charac ter Change File E felp H 5 Tin IV Next Time Open On Double click R Internal Relay ji Level Operation m a Character Change menw _ _ menor Oo o p o
30. Sat Cell SOUMOS sescesciceennaa wat a ieee a a a eee 5 2 521d Setting methods enei nati vise aaa a a teste dete E aia 5 3 5 2 Delete Cell Settings so secsccescccdeeiecaesitheveedenyissniyenisaedvenasivdeasiseedeanteaeienedeeets 5 11 5 37 Copy CelkSeting Ss neinn eee en ao ean ee 5 12 5 4 Paste Cell Settings sien es es ole ae ie eee 5 13 5 5 Set Cell Onder eics sind wleve dita eats eee eee 5 15 5 67 RUMPOCWA Y e e ea e EE tanec ee ela IN neta che neha weumbatmnehierc ates 5 16 5 7 EXW POWAY Y panessneosuegauioananun inanan a a 5 17 5 8 Read POWAY Settings Again s ssesssessssrrrsrrsrrrrrsrrrerrrrsrrrerrrrerrrerrreennt 5 18 Wy eS LLIN Sic es Aaa ee eet nc ach ne EES 5 19 5 10 Stop MONITOT dereira EE ea detiveey eae detee ets 5 20 5 11 Downlodd Data wii cet eee aide oe eRe eas 5 21 5 12 UpdateAll Sheet Data sosunccunusunusnununu neo aN ees 5 22 5 13 Update Active Sheet Data o 5 cciccescassies cages seis ttavaetes ster caesetissieseaeeeecseeeeets 5 23 5 14 Save Excel le ps asaqarea ere oes oo Goo Meo ere ee ren aoa oe 5 24 BAS Save El EME Files e sarees cane cv esas eaea baad odes eaea eae araeth tatea iata tatni 5 25 5 16 COMPIE xx arere e feet an dete eet anasto A ETA E aT 5 26 Buty IPROtSCHING TNE Shet tes ssescuscreeatd eases iat acti nein ieee 5 27 6 Registering Module a aces eee a eee 6 1 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences s ccicnien ieee ae atdae 6 2 6 2 Character Change in csosdscacscesedea Nesen a Neseaca eased E
31. This event will not turn off after the line is severed Read Register Set the data register for the uploading of the PLC information when the line is connected by the PLC The node number is limited to node number 1 Up to 3 words of the specified data register starting from the registered order is uploaded 1st word 1 is fixed 2nd word the event which you would like to turn on after the line is connected is set by hexadecimal 3rd word O is the error reception 1 is the ongoing connection Note that when there is a check mark placed at both the Receive check box at the Network and Error Reception check boxes then only from the 3rd word can PCWAY determine whether the line connected by the PLC is by ongoing connection or the error reception condition Now set the PLC node number By clicking the Connection No PB button the Connection No dialog box is displayed With this place a check mark for the node number which you wish to connect Note When a check mark is placed at the Use link unit No when connection by RS232C for this go to the file menu R Settings C R Option O the registered Informing Relay and Read Register accesses PLC of node No 0 5 Pulse Width Setting e Relay ON Time When specifying pulse operation at the relay settings then you must set your desired pulse width time The default setting is 500msec 6 Refresh Interval Settings e Display Data Specify the interv
32. is required at the PLC PCWAY reads the Read Register PLC node number as 1 However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 The Read Register stores the values given below 1st word Fixed to K1 2nd word Event number to turn on specified by HEX 3rd word Fixed to K1 Since the data value that becomes the event number is stored in the data value of the 2nd word that event is set to on To inform the PLC of the connection click the Over 65 Regions O button and set the informing relay at the MODEM Over 65 Regions The Informing Relay is set to on only for the PLC with the node number 1 However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Informing Relay PLC node number becomes 0 Click the Connection No P button and place a check at node number 1 in the Connection No dialog box that appears 4 8 1 3 Informing of Errors to a Personal Computer from PLCs Same Port The phrase same port refers to the port number when MODEM is selected under Network Communication Type on the EEAS menu item under Network for Op
33. it is necessary to have a program which will self hold itself adapted to the operations of the informing and the trigger of PCWAY Tage Geica PCWAY Internal processing Informing device R100 J note When the relay link area M has been set as the trigger it is necessary to set the informing relay ee o Operations when the Trigger is the Event V When the event V has been specified as the trigger PCWAY will perform the internal treatment file processing etc when event V has turned to on And then PCWAY will turn off the event V which has been set as the trigger In such a case it is not necessary to specify the informing relay Specify this when it is necessary for you to inform the PLC that the PCWAY internal treatments has been completed However for the event V which has been specified as the trigger at the Sound Startup registering PCWAY will not turn OFF this event even when the sound playing has completed After you have confirmed the sound it is necessary for the user to turn OFF event V manually by hand Trigger device VO PCWAY intemal processing Omit sound playing Informing Event Apart from the upper informing relay which handshakes with the PLC there exists the informing event The informing event promotes PCWAY to turn ON the event V after the internal treatment has been completed This is used when you would like to have other internal treatment started sequentially i
34. 0 to 255F max V Event 0 to 99F 7 C NET No Reference command button This will only be displayed when the Network Type of Operation Preferences is specified as Modem Choose the number of C NET No at C NET Settings enter with the command button 8 Informing relay Set this when there is a PLC relay which you would like to turn ON after the file processing You must set this when the Trigger device is specified as Relay link 9 Informing event Set this when there is an event which you would like to turn ON after the file processing 10 Message during execution Input the message to display during the file processing n 6 51 11 Settings of each of the fields According to the setting for the field type each of the setting items will differ There is no need to do the settings for date and time since the date and time of the computer will be downloaded as data Subject Select which data to process Access method Set the processing when writing in PLC data No M Message No F Formula No Set the register number which has been chosen for the access method Specify partners Set when the PLC has been chosen for the processing at Subject Fixed char Input when fixed char has been chosen for the processing at Subject Within 16 characters Date 10 digits 99 99 99 Time 8 digits 99 99 99 Character Subject None Nothing is written in to the file PLC Writes in to the file t
35. 2 When connecting from PCWAY to the remote PLC Only manual connection is possible You cannot have the single connection performed for all registered remote regions in rotation as you can with less than 64 remote regions 3 When connecting from the remote PLC to PCWAY There are two types of connections as below _ Normal reception Using the same COM port used for 2 above you can receive data from the PLC Once received you can also have connection maintained until specified Error reception Using the same COM port used in 2 above or another COM port you can receive data from the PLC Once received the required processed are performed and the connection is automatically severed 4 Display functions Data from the remote region cannot be displayed on sheets using the Microsoft Excel application 4 42 5 Miscellaneous The registered telephone numbers can be used with other tool software such as FPWIN Differences in the setup When using the public phone lines to connect a personal computer to the PLCs the setup procedures will change depending on whether there are more or less than 65 remote PLCs e When less than 65 PLCs are connected remove the check from the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preference s dialog box Ee Operation Preferences x File E Settings C Help H PC Type Refresh Interval Settings PC Type Display Data 1 OOmsec Netvork Re
36. A button at the Modem Support dialog box At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word The Modem Support register number is stored as a decimal number 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on specified in HEX 3rd word Fixed to K1 Since the data value that becomes the event number is stored in the data value of the 2nd word that event is set to on Inform PLC of phone line connection To inform the connected status to the PLCs that are considered to be connected you must set the informing relay This is done at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box You can specify more than one node number By this relay turning on the PLC can verify the status of the phone line connection Phone line disconnection When the Event to confirm the connection turns off the phone line is disconnected Or if the Event has not been turned on the line is automatically cut off if the setting of the Waiting Time parameter is exceeded Concerning the Phone Line Connecting PLC It is important to be aware of the information given below regarding the phone line connecting PLC e Before calling it is necessary to have the RS232C port usage set to Use Serial Data Communication general purpose port Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 e After
37. Applicable information DLL Uses w_mecrdpc dll Since it is using the same DLL as PCWAY make sure to use the program that uses this function from the same directory that PCWAY is executed from 7 4 3 Changing the Status of the Specified Event Number VC Function PCWAYapiEventWrite e Function Change the status of the specified event number e Construction short FAR PASCAL PCWAYapiEventWrite char pcEventString Event number short sOnOffSwitch Data value to change e Parameter pcEventString Specifies the character string of the event number ending with NULL sOnOffSwitch Specify 1 when you want to turn the specified event on and specify 0 when you want to turn it off If any value other than 0 or 1 is set processes are carried out as if 1 was specified e Return value When the event is changed as desired 0 is returned If an event number that does not exist is specified for the argument 1 is returned e Explanation Reverses the status of event 19E V19E short sResult sResult PCWAYapiEventRead 9E Reads status of V19E if 1 sResult IV19E is on if 0 PCWAYapiEventWrite 19E 0 Turns V19E off MessageBox NULL Turned V19E off EVENT MB_Ok else MessageBox NULL The event number specified at the argument is invalid EVENT MB_OK else if 0 sResult V19E is off if 0 PCWAYapiEventWrite 19E 1 Turns V19E on MessageBox NULL Turne
38. Cellinfo xls file in the folder used to install PCWAY usually this is located under Program Files PCWAY 8 5 8 4 Concerning the copying of the system created with PCWAY e When copying to another folder 1 Create the folder where you will perform the copying to 2 After saving and compressing the current PCWAY environment by the procedures of the Back up Utility dialog box please decompress this at the folder which you have created at the upper No 1 folder Already the file of PCWAY is in a restoration folder And when the file of the restoration folder is newer than the file of the backup it is not able to restore PCWAY At the time Restore after deleting the file of PCWAY plc cmt in a restoration folder For further details 8 5 Back up Utility 3 Start Operation Preferences of POWAY and change the work folder to the upper No 1 folder The procedures is the same as above when copying to other personal computers When there is the possibility that PCWAY has been technically versioned up please install PCWAY in to the upper No 1 folder after you have completed the upper No 1 and No 2 procedures The file will be converted automatically e When you will configure the system initially 1 Create the folder which you will perform the copying to 2 Usually the PLC folder is made under Program Files PCWAY All of the files which have been newly made are stored in to PLC Copy all of the files of a
39. Communication Time out Sec After establishing the connection enter the timeout interval every communication within the range from 1 to 950 sec Default value 10 Until establishing the connection this setting is invalid Connection Time out Sec Until establishing the connection enter the timeout interval every communication within the range from 1 to 180 sec Default value 60 Using each link path of MEWNET 1 Example of Hardware Using Tool port of CPU PCWAY Computer Ethernet W lt Ethernet RS232C Converter Unit RS232C MEWNET H W Link Unit Check number 0 2 and 3 to enter the node number above Connect No 1 PLC with the node No 0 Using ET LAN Unit Ethemet MEWNET HM Link Unit ET LAN Unit No 1 Link Unit must set the CPU right side When you directly connect PCWAY and our ET LAN Unit Ethernet cable uses the crossing cable J s NoTe Only top hierarchy level in each link unit of MEWNET can be connected while the second hierarchy level later can not connected 2 Setting method Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Type of Records O gt Operation Preference D or click the icon button in the Tools bar Following Operation Preference dialog box is displayed For select Ethernet Local from network types Click eee under Network Enter required items with selecting Ethernet Local from Network Type EE Operation Bistarmee Ethernet Local C NET RS232C MO
40. Connection from PCWAY Operation of Phone Line Connection Remove the check from the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box Click the button that appears and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears E A Operation Preferences oOoaiianwh amp WO NN we 10 PRP P eB REE OIRO bone The processes for phone line connection are to be performed in the order given below 1 Start Phone line connection processing starts when the specified event V turns on Connection is maintained while the specified event V remains on Connection is severed when the specified event V turns off J s NoTe Set the use for the RS232C port on the PLC side to Perform the computer link 2 Calls up PCWAY dials the specified phone number and waits for a response If a normal response is given phone line connection is made If an error response is given or if a response is not given after a certain period of time connection is not made Communication The set period time for waiting is set by clicking the T button for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box and specifying the desired wait time at Public Line Timeout 3 Read the PLC status After connection is established PCWAY will read the statuses of the PLC node numbers set at Connection No P in order If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read a retry will be attempted at least once
41. Do you want to delete will appear Then click Yes button Chapter 7 Overview List for Reference 7 1 Notation method of the Memory area in PCWAY Memory area name Number Number PCWAY of point notation method Relay External input relay X 8192 0 511F X0 X511F External output relay Y 8192 0 511F YO Y511F Internal relay R 14192 0 886F RO R886F Special Interval Relay R 176 9000 910F R9000 R910F Link relay L 10240 0 639F LO L639F Timer Contact T 1 3072 0 3071 T0 T3071 Counter Contact C 1 3072 0 3071 C0 C3071 Relay link area M 4096 0 255F MO0 M255F Event V 1600 0 99F V0 V99F Memory Data register DT 10240 0 10240 DT0O DT10240 ioe Link data register LD 8448 0 8447 LDO LD8447 File register FL 32765 0 32764 FLO FL32764 Special data register DT 256 9000 9255 dt0 dt255 256 90000 90255 dt0 dt255 Timer Counter set value SV 3072 0 3071 SV0 SV3071 Timer Counter elapsed value EV 3072 0 3071 EV0 EV3071 Data link area 2 4096 0 4095 m0 m4095 External Input WX 512 0 511 WX0 WX51 1 External Output WY 512 0 511 WY0 WY511 Internal Relay WR 887 0 886 WRO WR886 Link Relay WL 640 0 639 WLO WL639 The above number is restricted in the area of PLC regarded as the object of connection Gag eNote 1 The timer and counter can be used only if being used with the MEWNET H 2 The data link area can be used only when MEWNET H is used 7 2 Use file name
42. Event 0 to 99F When you register M you are sure to register informing relay please 5 Subject Enter the subject of the e mail to be send Up to 256 characters in one byte characters can be entered 6 116 6 Address Enter the addresses in To Cc or Bcc There are no limitations of e mail address number The address can be selected from the Address List that will appear by clicking Address Select _Address Select button How to select the address from the Address List Clicking Address Select button displays the following dialog box on which the pre registered addresses are listed A new address can be added on the List using Pek kena button For details concerning the addition of a new address refer to Adding a New Address to the Address Book as shown below E mail Setting Address Book Selected Destination Address List Add est Test aaa bbb ip Edit Samplei samplei ecece dd Samp lez sample2 111 222 333 Delete Address Select lt lt D lt lt Select To gt gt To lt lt __ lt lt Select ce gt gt Ce lt lt _ lt lt Select Bec gt gt Bee Pf yt Deletes by Delete Key w 2 From the Address List select the addresses to which you wish to send e mail s and click lt lt Select To gt gt lt lt Select Ce gt gt and or s select Bec gt gt Jin Address Select Then the selected addresses will be ad
43. J s ote Regarding the amount of retries If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read retries will be attempted until the time set for Public Line Timeout elapses If the status cannot be read by then that PLC will be considered to be disconnected If the status of none of the set PLC nodes can be read connection is severed 4 Inform PLC of phone line connection In order to alert the user that the PLC judged to be connected is connected to the line the setting for Relay specified for the node number registered for Node which is displayed by pressing Details D under Modem Support is turned off and then goes on This relay going on means that the line connection on the PLC side has been confirmed Since it is possible that an error could have occurred at the PLC leaving the informing relay on from the last phone line connection it is first turned off and then on again The duration the informing relay is turned off can be set at Relay ON Time for Pulse Width Settings in the Operation Preferences dialog box 5 Turn on the informing event If an Informing Event is set at the Modem Support dialog box the Informing Event turns on after the Informing Relay turns on It is also possible to have internal PCWAY processes File Processing etc work together with this event 6 PLC surveillance First the relay link area set with C NET Settings is checked If a relay link area that is on is set as a tr
44. Jur z From 1 7 Word 7 n m i Node 1 gt jea 0 From 1 7 Word No JERE eE No firr SE am C Yes Node 17 jaf 0 From 1 Word Item Explanations 1 C NET No This will be displayed only when Modem has been specified as the Network Type at Operation Preferences Registerable numbers with each modem number 1 to 64 Comment Input comment Imputable up to 32 characters Execute Select Yes in order to make the execution possible Comment Input comment for No Relay link range Register the range which you will use as the relay link Select Node within the 0 to 64 range Select WR Internal relay or WL Link relay and input the first number Select the word numbers of the range Setting range Displays the contents which has been set at the relay link range 7 PCWAY Notation The setting range is displayed using the PCWAY notation method If the Network Type has been set to MODEM in Operation Preferences setting item 6 Setting range to 1RO 1R15F sets 1M0 1M15F as the PCWAY notation method The 1 in 1M0 is the number selected with the 1 C NET No parameter In other words if C NET No 2 has been selected 2M0 2M15F will be set as the setting range and if C NET No 3 is selected the range will be 3M0 3M15F If the Network Type has been set to anything other than MODEM in Operation Preference however 1 will be set for the C NET N
45. Microsoft Excel book used in PCWAY as the attachment file Before sending it whether all Sheet data is updated or not can be selected For details on this function refer to 5 12 Update All Sheet Data 10 Attaches the designated file Place a check mark in this check box when you wish to send a file other than the one specified in Attaches the book of the Microsoft Excel in PCWAY now as the attachment file 11 This Checkbox attaches after compressing the attachment file to the own restoring file Place a check mark in this check box when you wish to send the attachment files specified in Attaches the book of the Microsoft Excel in PCWAY now and Attaches the designated file above by compressing them to self extracting LZH format files 12 Informing relay Place a check mark in the Execute check box when you wish to turn ON the PLC contact in the status that the e mail sending processing is completed Be sure to place a check mark however when you have selected M Relay link for the Trigger Device 13 Informing event Place a check mark in the Execute check box when you wish to turn ON the event in the status that the e mail sending processing is completed eNote When Dial Up connection is used an e mail is sent at the intervals specified in the Send interval time under Operation Preferences which is in the E mail Configuration dialog box after the e mail sending processing is completed When LAN i
46. Preferences dialog box Remove the check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Modem Support 0 Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears File E Settings C Help H PC Type p Refresh Interval Settings PC Type Display Data 1 OOmsec Network Relay Link 1 OOmsec Net Type MODEM File Processing 1 O0msec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 OOmsec A t Permit the V Receive COA CLER H Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 100 Error Reception 0 Communication ee i Settings A fora Entire Range Number of regions I Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 i Timeout Settings Pulse Width Settings Retry own UF Relay ON Time E OOmsec Interval fs z min Work Folder C Program Files PCWAY Drive W e When the PLC dials the phone number and informs of the error PCWAY reacts by performing the processes given below Recognizes RING When the PLC calls up PCWAY receives the RING After the RING is received it waits for CONNECT Receives CONNECT With the reception of CONNECT it recognizes the reception of an error Reads the read register of node number 1 Reads three words of the PLC data at the Read Register set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the All Settings A button at the Modem Support di
47. Read Write C Connection E Connection Settings SEEC 1 Event no fo 2 gt Character Change No fi v Character Change IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 Event No Input the event number 2 Character Change No Set the number for Character Change h h When you do not know the corresponding number by left clicking the ___cheracter change button the registering screen will be displayed With this select the desired number and finish ag Note When operating the event this will always be operated by level operation reverses the current status lt is not possible to operate by pulse or to perform the on operation and the off operation 5 1 1 5 Connection Cell Settings 2 xi Target r ttribute K psa Read Only C Register C File Data C ReadjWrite C Event Write Only Connection Settings lie Bah 1 Node No fi 2 Character Change No fi z Character Change IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 Node No Select the node number 2 Character Change No Set the number for Character Change When you do not know the corresponding number by left clicking the ___cheracter change button the registering screen will be displayed With this select the desired number and finish Connection Settings operates the setting status of Connection No or displays It doesn t have the functi
48. Regions 0 e m Timeout m Pulse Width Settings Retry Relay ON Time l 1l OOmsec Inte Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY a ewok beef froo Z C NET RS232C COM port MODEM MEWNET H ema Baud rate No Connection Ethernet Local Initialize Ethernet Remote iaie Data length I 7 bits 8 bits l Help m Stop bit 1 bit 2bits m Parity Non C Odd C Even Dial mode C Puse Tone Others faror Time out fio x sec Public Line Time out eo 7 sec Modem Command 4T Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 zi It is assumed that phone line connection will be performed manually with Modem Support by storing the various remote region settings telephone number etc at Modem Support For more information regarding settings refer to the Help supplied with Modem Support Connection at the phone line is initiated when the specified event V turns on e Itis also possible to inform errors to POWAY from remote PLCs using public phone lines This function can be used even if the PCWAY network type is not set to modem i e MEWNET H or C NET RS232C However if the network type is C NET RS232C then two or more COM ports are required Place a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the button Perform the required communication settings in the dialog box that appears P Operation Preferences C Program Files PC
49. accessed this mode will remain effective until the power supply to the PLC is turned off The mode can be canceled in the PCWAY settings but it remains stored in the CPU of the PLC In this case the power supply to the PLC 2 has to be turned off in order to cancel the mode When FP10SH only the tool port can be adopted for use 7 Communication with the setting unit no of the Ethernet connection Checked The PLC is accessed using the Link Unit No Unchecked The PLC is accessed using the home Node No EE 8 Monitoring command of MEWTOCOL is not used Uncheck this check box when connecting to equipment that does not support the monitoring command MEWNET H In order to use this network it is necessary to use the MEWNET H link board and the MEWNET H link software both independently sold Register Board No Segment Address No Use at 0 Refer to the chart below OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF l ON OFF OFF l on OFF OFF OFF TON OFF OFF f OFF OFF i OFF OFF OFF l OFF lorr OFF l OFF lorr orr l OFF OFF OFF Segment SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 Memory area for Address No the user 0 ON ON ON ON ON C0000 COFFF Sake Cara RAN ra ee Ton Baar aaa Tal ace See oe lan AG a a F ee ag o E N S E OFF OFF OFF ON ON C7000 C7FFF ane i F ae E a ae
50. and Ctrl E are pressed in recording new macros the following macros are automatically recorded in Module respectively Application Run PCWAYsubShellPcwayStart Application Run PCWAYsubRunStart Application Run PCWAYsubFileSave 7 5 2 Available for WR WX WY and WL devices e WR WX WY and WL devices can be used for Cell Settings and file processing When Register is specified for Target in Cell Settings followings are added in the device code WR Internal Relay WX External Input Can be selected only in Read WY External Output WL Link Relay When PLC is selected for Subject in File Processing WR WX WY and WL are added in the Specify partner code 7 5 3 7 5 4 Available for Decimal point Real number data e Data in PLCs can be used as Decimal point Real number data in Cell Settings and file processing When Register is specified for Target in Cell Settings the following is added in Display Method RAL Real number When Real num is selected for Access method under the condition that the real number is specified in File Processing the real number data is output to the file Digits after decimal point must be specified in File Master To process the data as Real num in the previous version in other words to display calculation results using the real number data specify Integer for Access method NOTE Real number data is descri
51. be registered as the relay link area It is not possible to write into the PLC relay link area from the link board which is attached to the computer For detailed information refer to the MEWNET H Link Unit manual and other documents If using only the functions that display PLC information in Microsoft Excel cells or download Microsoft Excel cell values to the PLC it is not necessary to specify a relay link area M in the MEWNET H settings software Setting Operation Preferences Run Operation Preferences and set the information introduced to you below Click on the S button under Network Select MEWNET H under Network Type Enter the correct settings for the Registered Board No Segment Address and Interrupt parameters and enter a setting for the Timeout parameter For the PLC which is currently connected click the _comection wo command button and run Connection No Place a check mark at the check box for the node which you will adopt for use For further information refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences and 6 16 Connection No Communication Setting Operation Prefer xj C NET RS232C MODEM EMEWNET H No Connection Ethernet Local Ethernet Remote foz f5 C Program Files PCWAY 3 3 C NET RS232C Connection m The number of the PLC nodes which can be connected to the computer during the C NET connection is Max 99 nodes It depends on hard
52. being read and the data is then to be written to a file select the No in Operation Formula Specify partner Set the PLC device number which you will read Real Subject Number None Nothing will be written in to the file PLC Writes the device data which has been registered at Specify partner in to the file Access method Integer Processes the data which has been read as the numerical value integer Real number Processes the data which has been read as the numerical value real number Input the formula No at the No of the next item No Formula No If any kind of operation is to be carried out on the PLC data being read and the data is then to be written to a file select the No in Operation Formula Specify partner Set the PLC device number which you will read Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and exits registering procedures Exit X Finishes registering procedures e Edit E Paste saved contents P Pastes the memorized contents of the Register Contents Copy Copy saved contents C Memorizes the contents of the currently displayed number Delete saved contents D Deletes the contents of the currently displayed number Field Copy C It is possible to copy to another field based on the settings of a certain field It is also possible to specify the increased address
53. boot the Modem Support function and specify the telephone numbers and other information IS Modem Support File E Help H peeo o oooO C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments ial atin 320 A fate Bec SS ets Ta Bd RO Tin Error Recepti I Modem Support x a No 1 Execute Vv C NET No il Browse W Connection No J 1 Browse P Single Trigger V Yes Vv J ol Ongoing Trigger V Yes y J o Limited Time V None 0 min Tel No 123456789012 Informing Relay V Notify fr z o Informing Event MV Notify y ol Comments Error Reception gt PageUp U PageDown D Help H Set at Read Register edit box going from the All Settings button For further details refer to 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line or 6 14 Modem Support I Modem Support File E Help H Modem Support C NET Con Sin Ong Lin No No No Trig Trig Tin v OQ 2 2 2 Vi V o Set All Trigger v Utes G s a 3 V2 V2 No O 4 4 4 vo vo No Interrupt Trigger v o J Yes g 5 5 5 vo vo No ry i 0 es E 6 6 6 vo vo No Terminate Trigger Vv m a T MG xo No Read Register DT o 8 8 8 vo vO No Ey ge 9 9 VO vo No No of Retries 0 Times O 10 10 10 VO vO No O 11 11 11 Vo vo No Resend Wait Time 90 Sec 90 999 E 12 22 12 VO vO No i i 0 999 O 13 13 13 VO vo No Next Connection Time 90 Sec O 14 14 14 VO vo No 15 15 15 VO vo No Exit E Help H G 16 1
54. calling make sure to immediately change RS232C port usage to the Perform computer link setting after receiving CONNECT Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 4 8 3 When There are More than 65 Remote Regions Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears EF Operation Preferences IBM CS ae ga n e Using the public phone lines you can keep track of the data from remote PLCs max 4096 regions display the data perform operations with the data and save the data as files Once a remote PLC is connected to the public phone lines you are able to use all the functions provided with PCWAY Communication Click the ea button for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box Choose MODEM for Network Type and properly set the communication settings ad Operation Preferences File E Settings C Help H Ss Communication Setting Operation Preferences x PC Type Refresh PC Type Display Network Relay I Net Type MOD Over 65 Regions Bile P Communication Settings S o Permit the connection M V Receive Event H Hold Rs Error Reception W J Receive fio Number of regions Over 65
55. can also be returned to the enable connection Setting Enable and Disable Double click the Connection cell assigned in Cell Settings The message saying Is it OK to enable disable the designated station No is displayed When the OK button is pressed the designated station number is switched to Enable Disable When the Cancel button is pressed switching to Enable Disable is not performed ag eNoTe To use this function the PLC station No to be connected must be specified beforehand in Connection No of Operation Preferences This function toggles the mode enable and disable from the start of monitoring after PCWAY is started up until PCWAY stops 7 6 Upgrade items of Ver2 74 e Supports Microsoft Windows Vista The PCWAY can run on Microsoft Windows Vista e Supports Microsoft Excel 2007 The PCWY can run on Microsoft Excel 2007 e Supports the USB for GT32 The USB is selectable for the network type of operation preferences Selecting the USB for the network type enables the USB connection with PLCs connected to the GT32 Only one GT32 can be connected Multiple GT32 connected to the USB cannot be connected For the details refer to the USB connection of hardware construction e Supports special data registers of PLC FP X Special data registers in the 90000s of a PLC FP X can be specified by the PCWAY e Supports for the equipment that does not support the monitoring co
56. columns 4 7 A y EXAMPLE e Register Setting No 2 When you would like to display the data register DTO to DT5 as a Character code please set as below Target z Attribute C Relay Read Only Register C File Data C Read Write Event Connection roe Connection Settings Write Only Node No 1 X Device Code DT Data Register Device No fo gt Display Method cr Character Code 2 p No of Words fe 7 IV Next Time Open On Double click 1 Set the Display Method to CHR Character Code at the Display Method edit box 2 Set to 6 at the No of Words edit box RY EXAMPLE e Register setting No 3 Based on the value of the DTO data register to display RUN for a DTO value of 0 STOP for a DTO value of 1 and WAIT for a DTO value of 2 enter the settings shown below Target Attribute Ki Relay Read Only Register File Data Read Write Event Connection C Connection Settings Write Only Node No fi X Device Code or Data Register ii Device No fo Display Method mse Message Display 7 No of Words fi i i iat Set the following for No 1 in the Message No ED Ml Message Message r Data value 0 RUN Data value 1 STOP Data value 2 WAIT IV Next Time Open On Double click Cancel Delete EE EE ia Message x File E Edit E H lp H C Character input Edit display color Select
57. command button the C NET settings dialogbox will be displayed By going to File of C Net Settings dialog box gt Select current No and finish the corresponding number will be chosen and will return to the File processing dialog box 3 Next after the file processing if there is a relay or event which you would like to turn to ON do the settings of Informing Relay and Informing Event However if you have chosen M Relay link before at Trigger device make sure to set the informing relay 4 If there is a message which you would like to display during the file processing input this at Message during execution When wishing to register file execution startup timing and action afterward only set this at the File Trigger dialog box e Settings for each of the fields qe RS a a ae el ga eee ee oe ee ee i el EE i ee i ae ee R Fixed char 2 1 The specified field type set at the file which has been selected at Specify corresponding file will be displayed 2 There are necessary settings for each of the field types For further information refer to each of the corresponding field settings at Item explanations 3 Change the field number using the scroll bar on the very right 6 7 File Trigger e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various types of records O gt File Trigger H e Click 4 RA File Trig
58. connecting to remote PLCs from PCWAY as described above Once PCWAY is connected to the public phone lines you are able to use all the functions provided with PCWAY Communication Click the eae button for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box Choose MODEM for Network Type and properly set the communication settings File E Settings Help H Communication Setting Operation Preferences X PC Type a C NET RS232C fees COM port Net Type HODEN MEWNET H Lancel Communication Baud rate No Connection Settings 3 Ethernet Local Initialize B Permit the Data length Ve connection M C 7 bits Help Error Reception Stop bit 1 bit C 2bits Number of regions r Parity Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 Non C Odd Even p Pulse Width Settings ________ _ Djial mode Relay ON Time 1 00msec C Puse Tone C Others jator Work Folder fo Program Files PCWAY Time out fio z sec Public Line Time out eo z sec Modem Command 4T Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 4 j Place a check in the check box for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the button Perform the required reception settings at the dialog box that appears E A Operation Preferences For more details regarding the reception settings refer to the module list in 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences 4 8 2 1 Surveillance of Remote PLCs
59. connection when line connection meets with failure Enter the times of retry within the range from 0 to 9 5 Resend Wait Time Enter the waiting time from above failure of line connection to re connection 6 Send Line Enter the number of line via which data is sent at a time from a personal computer to each PLC This number of line especially is required mainly when using ISDN line When using both of the ISDN line for sending the number of line is 2 and when using one line for following reception line the number is 1 Be sure to keep following condition Total number of line the number of line to send the number of line to receive Receive All Setting Setting for connection from PLCs to a personal computer a personal computer receives 7 Reception Check it when PCWAY is connected to PLC if receiving the reception from PLC 8 Error Reception Check it when PCWAY is connected to PLC if receiving the reception from PLC Different from Reception and Error Reception Action of PCWAY Reception Continuous connection can be active until specifying See descriptions from 1 to 3 in former Reception Details Error Reception Immediately only required processing turning on the event number saved in two WORD of Read Register and this event performing as the trigger to cut off connecting line automatically In PLC the value saved in three WORD of following Read Register is different 9 Read Register In connec
60. data will be displayed as the following shown below El Microsoft Excel Book1 File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY B bme m p e F T REPS Dm iG J13 b 1 2 1 19 2004 10 12 27 0 200 300 3 1419 2004 10 12 58 10 300 15 4 1 19 2004 10 13 13 500 600 TE 5 1 19 2004 10 13 27 30 20 15 6 1419 2004 10 13 43 800 60 258 rd When updating the file takes too long select Do Not Update instead of Updating File Contents Each Time in Update Method w o Attribute Relay Read Only Register File Data Read Write C Event Connection Write only Connection Settings Wie Oey File No fi i File No Reference Generation Generation 1 Display Method Display All Records At Once z Update Method Geca IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete In such a case in order to update the displaying of the file it is necessary to e set Display renewal event at File Master dialog box e do the necessary settings at Cell Settings in order to turn this event to ON File E Edit E Help H File base setting File No 1 Production File Comment Production File File name test Record quanti on Write mode Insert at end of file Display renewal event V 0 he Treathent when file data is full Contifiue processing Y Set the event to turn on when full yo Specify field type TYPE Nbne Ma Method oniy specified
61. display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CT ee Cr background color TE H al olf of sl I I 1 1 When you would like to edit the display color only Select Edit display color first and then select the character color or the background color or specify directly at Select character color or Select background color When the display color is specified left click at When ON or When OFF of the number which you would like to change The color will change to the currently selected color Character Change File E Help H a ON When OFF z sr C Character input Edit display color Select color Background color CT ee Cr background color TEC iiit E Select character color 2 When all of the inputting has been completed by going to the menu bar gt File gt Save gt Exit or to Select Current No and finish the necessary registering will be completed However it is only possible to select Select current No and finish when you have registered at the Character Change dialog box enter this with the command button at the Cell Settings dialog box The number which is selected at Select No will be displayed at Character Change No at the Cell Settings dialog box When you would like to cancel the selected number click the Clear Selection command button W
62. fa CWAY English PCWAY English Yersion 2 5 J s ote When an error has emerged when you have started the macro which was created in the state of PCWAY add in being registered then it is necessary to re start Microsoft Excel 4 3 2 2 Built In functions PCWAY is ready with the following built in functions Use when necessary Method for inputting 1 When Sub Procedure Call Application Run Function name Argument 1 Example Download Data Call Application Run PCWAYsubDownLoad 2 When Function Procedure Return value Application Run Function name Argument 1 Example Specified saving process of Microsoft Excel file name File name TEST Dim Filename as String Filename Application Run PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType TEST Menubar Toolbar registration function e Cell Settings e Delete Cell Settings e Copy Cell Settings e Paste Cell Settings e Set Cell Order No Action e Set Cell Order Down word e Set Cell Order To the Right e Start PCWAY e Exit PCWAY e Read PCWAY Settings Again e Start Monitor e Stop Monitor e Download Data e Update All Sheet Data with message e Update All Sheet Data without message Sub PCWAYsubSetCell Sub PCWAYsubCellDel Sub PCWAYsubCellCopy Sub PCWAYsubCellPaste Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveNo Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveDown Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveRight Sub PCWAYsubShellPcwayStart Sub PCWAYsubExecuteStop Sub PCWAYsubExecuteRestart Sub PCWAYs
63. from the COM Port selected for Communication Settings A for Error Reception Basically only the PLC with the node number 1 can be accessed However by placing a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the PLC node number that is accessible can be changed to 0 Removing the check makes the PLC with the node number 1 accessible 1 Place a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in the Operation Preferences dialog box 2 Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Over 65 Regions 0 Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears For more details regarding the settings refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences Ee Operation Preferences x File E Settings C Help H PC Type m Refresh Interval Settings PC Type IBM PC AT F Display Data 1 O0msec Neneork _ Relay Link 1 00msec Net Type MODEM Over 65 Regions File Processing 1 O0msec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 O0Omsec IV Receive Permit the z connection HM Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 100 Error Reception w o Communication V Receive i Settings A Fora Entire Range j Timeout Settings
64. is required at the PLC PCWAY reads the Read Register PLC node number as 1 However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 The Read Register stores the values given below 1st word Modem Support number 2nd word Event number to turn on specified by HEX 3rd word Fixed to K1 Since the data value that becomes the event number is stored in the data value of the 2nd word that event is set to ON To inform the PLC of the connection click on Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box and set the informing relay IIS Modem Support You can set a multiple number of node numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g When there are 65 or more PLCs connected Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the Over 65 Regions 9 button to display the MODEM Over 65 Regions dialog box Ee Operation Preferences X MODEM Over 65 Regions Informing Relay Informing Event NV Inform y o 0 Read Register Node l DT Connection No iP eno ewan At this dialog box set the Read Register and after reception the PLC data is read with the Read Register that is set Setting the Read Register
65. list Character Change File W_BITCHR PLC Message File W_WRDMSG PLC Operation Formula File W_WRDCAL PLC Operation Formula Comment File W_WRDCAL CMT File Master File W_USRFFL PLC File Master Comment File W_USRFFL CMT File master intermediate cord File W_USRREC PLC File Processing File W_FSRKFL PLC File Processing Comment File W_FSRKFL CMT File processing intermediate cord File W_FSRITR PLC File Trigger File W_FLTRIG PLC Event Startup File W_VINTER PLC Weekly Timer File W_TIMSET PLC Interval Timer File W_CYCSET PLC C NET Setting File W_RELAY PLC C NET Setting Comment File W_RELAY CMT Auto Macro Startup File W_MACRO PLC Sound Startup File W_SOUND PLC Modem Support File W_PCTEL PLC Application Startup File W_WINEXE PLC Connection No File W_PCUNIT PLC Event Condition File W_EVENT PLC Ethernet Remote File W_ETHER PLC E mail Setting File W_MAILDATA PLC E mail Address Book File W_ADDRBOOK PLG E mail Permitted Reception File W_PERMITADDR PLC 7 3 Incorporation macro name list Input method 1 When Sub Procedure Call Application Run Function name Argument 1 Example Download Data Call Application Run PCWAYsubDownLoad 2 When Function Procedure Return value Application Run Functionname Argument 1 Example Spec
66. lt I E G G U u u u U ui m M meee E E G G u u E G gi E E a G a u eee E G E u u u u ugi E G u u a u u a a E E G E a u u G gi x B x m x x x x m al Item Explanations 1 Comment Input comment 2 Node number Place a check mark at the check box for the node number which you want to connect Ga Nore e The node number 0 cannot be used when the network type is MEWNET H The registering itself will not cause errors however it would not be possible to have PCWAY runned e The node number 0 cannot be used when the network type is C NET or the Modem building a C NET network using the C NET adapter In this case errors are not displayed for registration and PCWAY booting but the PCWAY may malfunction or may abort Menu bar e File F Save Saves Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures 1 Enter a comment If the setting was made using the Browse button for the Connection No specified for Details under Modem Support to display the comment immediately after it has been entered select a different number and then select the original number again The input comment is displayed in the Comment column shown below right after the colon Ee Operation Preferences x File F Settings C Help H pee ee ef o m PC Type Refresh Interval Settings PC Type Display Da
67. macro which you have made the PCWAY Add In program might not operate properly Therefore it is necessary to remove the PCWAY Add In program from Microsoft Excel first and then do the testing with the macro alone 2 Concerning on how to remove the PCWAY Add In program With Microsoft Excel 97 go to the main menu bar of Microsoft Excel gt Tools gt Add Ins Remove the check mark at PCWAY English at the check box lists of the Add In dialog box Run PCWAY Ctrl Shift B Exit PCWAY Ctrl Shift C Start Monitor Ctrl Shift D Stop Monitor Ctrl Shift E Download Data Ctrl Shift G Update All Sheet Data Ctrl Shift H Update Active Sheet Data Ctrl Shift Save Excel File Ctrl E Save HTML File Ctrl M M EXAMPLE When Ctrl Shift B Ctrl Shift D and Ctrl E are pressed in recording new macros the following macros are automatically recorded in Module respectively Application Run PCWAYsubShellPcwayStart Application Run PCWAYsubRunStart Application Run PCWAYsubFileSave 3 Execute the macro which you have created going from Microsoft Excel Tools gt Macro Make sure that you have not made any errors Add Ins 2 Add Ins available Analysis ToolPak I Analysis ToolPak VBA Cancel I AutoSave IV Conditional Sum Wizard I Lookup Wizard Browse T Microsoft Bookshelf Integration Vy eae I pcway Logger I Template Utilities 7 Update Add in Links
68. mail Error log File NAIS_ MewmllErr log The error contents saves into the file Please confirm the contents by the text editor NotePad etc Example Date Fri 10 Jan 2003 12 46 36 RECEIVE_ERROR or SOCKET_ERROR ERR AUTH Password supplied for TEST is incorrect she error details contents from windows Case RECEIVE_ERROR Please confirm the setting contents in Account name Password SMTP POP3 Case SOCKET_ERROR Please confirm the setting contents in SMTP POP3 Dial up The SMTP Server or the POP3 Server is busy Exception Maybe it s the disk error Please confirm the hard disk 16 Preservation period of the executed E mail file Enter the desired preservation period for the file stored in Sent file folder 17 This Checkbox attaches after compressing the attachment file to the own restoring file For the old version s add in send program This function is limited for the user who uses the old version Microsoft Excel add in software PCWAYMAIL xla In order to compress the attachment file place a check mark in this check box O af WN e Details E mail Setting S update ELI Sheet Dete fe No Upder The processing No to be executed is displayed 1 to 100 2 Execute Select whether the processing for the specified No is executed or not 3 Comment Input any comment 4 Trigger Device Specify the device to start the e mail function M Relay link 0 to 255F V
69. mode of ET LAN Unit Enter the first port number of following source station number If other programs run specify the first port number without repetition Here entered the first port number for source is the source port number opposite to the destination node number 1 Excluding the destination node number 1 the source port number is made by the first port number added to the destination node number decreasing by 1 First port number Destination node number 1 Source port number Example In the case of First Port No 1025 if Destination node number is one adopted source port number is 1025 by 1025 1 1 1025 else if Destination node number is 10 adopted source port number is 1034 by 1025 10 1 1034 else if Destination node number is 15 adopted source port number is 1039 by 1025 15 1 1039 Use LinkUnit Station Number Destination station No Oe if Computer Port No Add Bhange pelete When setting the Open method of the ET LAN unit for AFP3790 FP3 for PLC to Full passive mode above source port number must be entered in Ladder Diagram See Open Close Procedure in FP3 ET LAN Unit Introduction Manual for Open Method of the ET LAN Unit Station No Enter the node number within the range from 1 to 64 Default value 64 Ensure that the node number is not the same with the destination node number When not using the ET LAN unit the node number is invalid Use LinkUnit
70. name Function PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType _ Argument 1 as String Argument 2 as Integer As String Argumenti Specified file name File expansion xls is not included When you registered only the file name the HTML file is saved to the same folder as the Microsoft Excel book file Argument2 0 Saves the original book 1 Original book is not saved It is O in the case of omission Return value File name which was saved Folder name accompaniment Example The name called TEST is attached when saving the present book The original book is not saved Dim strFilename as String strFilename Application Run PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType TEST 1 e Save HTML File fixed File name Present file name Sub PCWAYsubHTMLFileSave e Save HTML File possible to specify file name Function PCOWAYfncHTMLFileSaveNameType_ Argument 1 As String Argument 2 As Integer As String Argumenti Specified file name File expansion htm is not included When you registered only the file name the HTML file is saved to the same folder as the Microsoft Excel book file Argument2 0 Saves the original book 1 Original book is not saved It is 0 in the case of omission Return value File name which was saved Folder name accompaniment e Operation Preferences Sub PCWAYsubShellEnvironUpdate e Character Change e Message e Operation Formula e File Master e File Processing e File Trigger e Event Startup e Weekly Timer e Interval Tim
71. o 4 7 Macro Name EE EEE PageUp U Pagepown D HeipiH Item Explanations 1 Execute Select whether to execute the selected No or not 2 Trigger Set the device which will start the execution 3 C NET No Displays only when the Network Type of Operation Preferences is Modem Set the number which has been set at C NET Settings After clicking the Browse command button the C Net Settings window will be displayed With File gt Select current No and finish it is also possible to select from here 4 Node Select the node of Informing Relay 5 Informing Relay Set this when there is a device which you would like to turn ON after the executing has been performed Make sure to set this when the M Relay link has been selected for the Trigger 6 79 6 Informing Event Set this when there is an event which you would like to turn ON after the executing has been performed 7 Macro Name Input the macro name which you would like to start Menu bar e File F 100 Records added Adds 100 records at a time It is possible to add up to 1000 registerings Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Do the settings whether to execute directly from the initial overview window or not Click the box on the left side of No I
72. only be selected when you have previously registered at Character Change dialog box enter this with the command button at the Cell Settings dialog box The number which has been registered at Select No will be displayed at Character Change No at Cell Settings When you would like to cancel the currently selected number click the Clear Selection command button The selection will be canceled however it is not possible to perform Select current No and finish fa Character Change x File F Help H Save S Export a STOP C Character input Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CT ee gt Select background color ee ee IMI When registered at Character Change Cell Settings BEEBEE BEEBEE 2 When editing 1 Edit the character and the display color of When ON and When OFF When you would like to edit the character only Select the Character Input radio button and left click the When ON list box By doing so this edit box will be highlighted and the character will turn to black allowing you to input the character After you have changed the character by this process this display color of the character will remain as it is and the character only will be changed Character Change File E Help H o then E om o j UNI ATM STOP Character input C Edit
73. setting items will be displayed Select the desired option Ba Interval Timer xj No Execute Interval Node Device Output Format Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H 3 Do the settings for the device which you will turn to ON Select the Node and Device and input the device number a Interval Timer xj No i Execute V Yes Interval 15ec Node 1 Device o Output Format Comments PageUp U PageDown D 6 73 4 Select either Pulse or Level at Output Format However when the device is V Event you can only select Level oo P ian Interval Timer xj No 1 Execute V Yes Interval 15ec iv Node fa Device R o Output Format Puise x Pulse Comments PageUp Uj PageDown D Help iH 5 Input a simple comment for the registered execution 6 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 11 C NET Settings e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt C NET Settings N a A e Click SE EU C NET Settings x File F Help H C NET No Et X Comment Conment Execute Relay link range PCWAY notation Bie EG 6 E Node 17
74. sheet protection of the sheet for example Sheet1 After the above function is inputted the following function is inputted Worksheets Sheet1 UnProtect StrPassword The next is the example of the protecting of the sheet once again After the above function is inputted the following function is inputted Worksheets Sheet1 Protect StrPassword e Changing the interval timer settings temporally Function PCWAYfncSetIntervalChange Argument 1 as Integer Argument 2 as Integer Argument 3 as Integer as Integer Argumenti Interval Timer No 1 to 100 Argument2 Execution flag 0 End 1 Execute Argument3 Interval time every seconds Return value 0 Normal 1 Interval timer no and specified error of folder to be executed 2 Specified error of execution flag 3 Specified error of interval time Example Execute the interval timer processing of No 1 at every 3 second interval Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncSetintervalChange 1 0 3 e Processing for obtaining the event number status Function PCWAYfncEventRead ByVal Argument 1 as String As Integer Argument 1 Event no Example For V21 the argument is 21 Return value 0 OFF 1 ON Example To obtain the status of event V21 Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncEventRead 21 If intRet is 1 the event is on and if 0 the event is off e Processing for setting the event number status Function PCWAYfncEventWrite
75. suitable for Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT Ver4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 e Memory A personal computer over 64MB is necessary It depends on OS e Hard disk It is necessary to have free space of 120MB MIN It is necessary that you have enough free space left in accordance to the contents of what has been registered e Floppy disk drive This is necessary when installing PCWAY e Mouse You must prepare a mouse suitable for Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT Ver4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 e Printer You must prepare a printer suitable for Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT over Ver4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 e Key unit This is already included in the PCWAY package Please attach this to either the printer port the USB port or the printer cable the printer cable is indispensable according to the key unit type e PLC The programmable controller of our FP series make must be used FP series selling in October 2009 e Others The MEWNET H board or modem is necessary according to the network type which will connect with the PLC Software e Basic software Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT Ver4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 e Microsoft Excel PCWAY is an add in software Therefore it is necessary to have Microsoft Excel 9
76. that different registers of multiple units were not monitored correctly in the same sheet 7 22 Chapter 8 Appendix 8 1 Applications The application file SampleListEng xls is in the Sample folder which is included in the PCWAY installed folder normally the folder is under Program Files PCWAY Customers are requested to use the following macros on your own responsibilities keyword macro record macro Microsoft Excel etc Based on the macro created from Tools gt Record macro gt Record new macro or etc change the macro by typing the letters on the keyboard if necessary file processing in another file with the File Save button Topic 1 Automatically Starting and Finishing PCWAY Auto Start Finish Topic 2 Changing the Worksheet Using the Command Button Change Sheet Topic 3 Setting the Colors Inside the Squares on the Worksheet Setting Color Part 1 by Turning the PLC Relays On and Off Part 1 Topic 4 Setting the Colors Inside the Squares on the Worksheet Setting Color Part 2 by Turning the PLC Relays On and Off Part 2 Topic 5 Moving the Graphic Figure by the PLC Data Area Moving Graphic Topic 6 Displaying the Chart Using the PLC Data Area Drawing Graph Topic 7 Displaying the Chart Using the File Data of PCWAY File Graph Topic 8 Turn the Event On Off Using the Command Button Event Set Topic 9 Printing Out the Report of the Conte
77. the Week PCWAY will turn on the relay and event at a specified time of a specified day of the week Set the necessary settings at Weekly Timer in order to use this For further information refer to 6 9 Weekly Timer To turn on relay RO of node number 1 using pulses Monday through Friday at 17 30 the following settings would be entered EE Weekly Timer File E Help H ma No Time Day Node Device Format Comments 1 00 00 1 2 00 00 1 RO Pulse 3 00 00 1 RO Pulse 4 00 00 1 RO Pulse 5 00 00 1 RO Pulse L GE Weekly Timer x No a a lt a Execute Specified Time rary J w o Specified Day M Non M Tue M Wed WV Thu WM Fri Sat Sun Node w 4 4 Device o Output Format Puise gt Comments J a PageUp U PageDown D By using together Weekly Timer and File Processing it is possible to perform the File Processing at a specified time everyday or by using Weekly Timer with the Auto Macro Startup it is possible to generate reports at a specified time everyday 4 4 2 Turn the Relay and Event to On at a Certain Interval PCWAY will turn the relay event to on at a certain interval In order to make use of this function set the necessary settings at Interval Timer For further information refer to 6 10 Interval Timer When you would like to turn event VO to ON at a 1 min interval set as the figures shown below kun Interval Timer File E
78. the argument 2 Microsoft Excel should not be booted multiple times to monitor PLC data If Microsoft Excel is booted by booting an external application while monitoring is already beginning an error will occur if an attempt is made to begin monitoring again Monitoring should only be begun by running one Microsoft Excel program 2 5 9 Export function of Each Registering Module This function added for printing the registering file If you edit the exported text file it can t reflect to the registering file Please print the registering file by software that edits the text file The software is Microsoft NotePad and Microsoft WordPad Microsoft WORD Microsoft Excel etc The text file is CSV mode 2 5 10 When you make the macro of the Microsoft Excel Verify the performance of your macro on your responsibility before starting up the system Matsushita Electric Works Ltd will not take responsibility for any abnormal operation due to a failure in your created macro linked with PCWAY Precautions for the users using Microsoft Excel 97 or later without fail describe Macro in the standard module e when to call up PCWAY macro function in the macro you created e when to register the created macro in the automatic macro start up In addition do not use the macro SetTimer function of Windows which is for Windows directly to execute This may cause an abnormal performance in Microsoft Excel 2 5 11 Oth
79. the relay link with the PLC when the production number has reached it s target number and will perform the sound playing using the link relay as the trigger By doing so it is possible to perform the sound playing using this link relay as the trigger For further information on the registering refer to 6 9 Weekly Timer and 6 10 Interval Timer The sound will be played over and over while this trigger is still ON Apart from other internal processings it is not possible with PCWAY to turn off the event or to turn on the informing relay with PCWAY Please turn off the trigger manually after confirming the sound Playing the sound using the link relay as the trigger Using the PLC create a program that enables self holding of the link relay that will serve as the trigger The playing of the sound can be stopped by assigning a cell in the Microsoft Excel sheet that handles pulsed operation of the relay that cuts off the self holding of the trigger Playing the sound using the event as the trigger When using the event as the trigger by assigning the cell which will operate this event at the Microsoft Excel sheet it is possible to stop the playing of the sound 4 5 2 Create the WAV file PCWAY does not have the WAV file attached to it Create the WAV file etc in order to play the sound Use windows Sound Recorder etc 4 5 3 Register at Sound Startup Start Sound Startup of and register the trigger etc in order to make
80. the status of the previous start condition is not to be changed when the specified sheet is displayed has become active but you simply want to view the on or off status and turn on the event When the sheet registered under the Sheet Name noted below has become active if the relay link specified for only the first trigger is on it is considered to have gone from on to off and the event is turned on Subsequently changes in the status are viewed and the event is turned on in the normal manner This function is used in cases such as when a specific sheet is displayed and you want to boot a macro using the initial function ag eNoTe When you have placed a check mark at Initialize by sheet name the relay link which has been set at Trigger will be watched only when the sheet registered at Sheet Name below becomes active When a different sheet is active then the informing event which was registered here will not be turned to ON Sheet Name Input the sheet name which you will check Comment Imputable up to 80 characters Menu bar e File F 100 Records Added Adds the registered records 100 at a time It is possible to add up to 1000 number of registers Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Do the settings which will sp
81. to Microsoft Excel sheet PCWAY Logger function List e Download data to the continuous area in PLC In case of Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadEthernet Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As String Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As Integer Argument 5 As Long Argument 6 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadEthernet2 Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As String Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As Integer Argument 5 As Long Argument 6 As Integer As Long Argument 1 PLC Station No Argument 2 Device Code WR WL DT SV EV LD FL IC Argument3 Device No If you access IC card please design by Hexadecimal Argument 4 File Register FL Bank No FL in FP2SH 0 1 2 Else 1 Argument 5 Number of words Argument6 Data value Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Others 8 9 e Upload data from continuous area in PLC In case of Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEthernet Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As String Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As Integer Argument 5 As Long As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEthernet 2 Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As String Argument
82. to select AIl Nodes With this it is possible to change the values all at once for all of the currently connected PLC s during the operating and the downloading 2 Device Code Left click within Device Code and select the desired device code 3 Device No Input the device number 5 5 4 Display method Select the data displaying method NUM Performs the operation based on the value which has been Numerical Value stored in to the register and then performs Read Write CHR Performs Read Write with the value which has been stored in to Character Code the register as the character code MSG Changes the message or the display color and displays based Message Display on the value 0 to 4096 which has been stored in to the register This can be selected only if Attribute Read Only has been selected HEX Performs Read Write by hexadecimal with the value which has Hexadecimal Display been stored in to the register BIN Performs Read Write by binary with the value which has been Binary Display stored in to the register MEW This is the same specification as the PLC relay number MEW Notation The 1st digit is described in hexadecimal and the digits after the 2nd digit is described in decimal RAL Reads or Writes the Real number of 2 word of PLC register Real number Real number is IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers format 5 No of words Left cli
83. to the 0 power logarithm natural logarithm of O 0 to the minus power square root of a negative value exponential of a negative value Operations of which the answer becomes 1 Zero power of the positive value Please do not use the following operation formula Formula of which the answer is over 10 2 Menu bar e File Save Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format When you have registered from the Operation Formula dialog box of Cell Settings Select current No and finish Displays the currently selected number at the Operation Formula entering from the corresponding command button Cell Settings and finishes Exit Finish the registering procedures e Compile Run Execute compile Error List If there is an error both the error contents and the area of the error will be displayed Registering procedures 1 Select the number which you will register Either left click at No area or select by using the scroll bar on the very right side where Comment Read Write is Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H 2 When the number has been specified then input the comment 3 Next if any kind of operation processing is to be carried out on the value that has been read and the result displayed enter the operation formula in the Read column The value to be read the PLC word device value should be indicated by X upper case half width when the o
84. to wait between hanging up and connecting the line to another node Any value between 0 and 999 may be set Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Set whether to execute directly from the overview window or not Select the check boxes on the left side of the No If there has been placed a check mark then the executing will be performed In order to do the settings of each of the items first select the row of the No which you would like to set and then click on the Details command button When you will do more general settings then click on the All Settings command button The respective Modem Support screens containing detailed information are displayed Enter the necessary settings Iz Modem Support x File E Help H meoo C NET Con Sin Ong Limited io No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments uF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o 1 2 3 13 13 VO vo No RO vO l4 14 14 VO vo No RO vO H5 15 15 vo vO No RO vo 16 16 16 VO vo No RO vo 17 a7 2 VO vo No RO vo 18 18 18 VO vO No RO vO All Settings A e Registering procedures of Details 1 Place a check mark at Execute when you will execute the contents of what was registered i LE Modem Support Sa a el elie ll L A 2
85. tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 e After calling make sure to immediately change RS232C port usage to the Computer link setting after receiving CONNECT Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 e Set the timeout time until receiving CONNECT to that of the PCWAY Resend Wait Time set at the dialog box displayed by clicking All Settings A at the Modem Support dialog box When calling up each other or when making retry attempts make sure that the retries are not made at the same timing 4 8 2 3 Connecting from a PLC Operation of Phone Line Connection from a PLC e Place a check in the Receive check box for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box to allow phone line connection from PLCs e Remove the check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box Modem Support 0 The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears EE Operation Preferences xj File E Settings C Help H PC Type Refresh Interval Settings gt PC Type rex PC AT z Display Data 1 O0msec Network Relay Link l OOmsec Net Type MODEN File Processing 1 O0msec Communication Settings 3 Macro Startup 1 OOmsec ly fuaceiee Permit the connection M p Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 10
86. u uug gi CE G u u u u u u gi E G u u uuu ui mm M BEEBEEEEEEE x x x x x x x x x x Settings for reception from the PLC Boot Operation Preferences and specify the following information Place a check mark by Receive under Network Then click on the Bisse tae button and enter the reception settings For detailed information refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences m When wishing to display the relay link area information onto the Microsoft Excel cell specify C NET No the same No as the Modem Support No to that node number Within the relay link area information for different regions can be specified on the same sheet Ya EXAMPLE When displaying RO of the PLC node number of region no 3 set 20 from the relay link area M of C NET No 2 Concerning other PLC information besides of the relay link area specify the PLC node number only for that region Ya EXAMPLE When displaying Data register D 0 of PLC node number 3 of region no 2 of the prior figure set 0 of Data Register D of Node 3 J s NoTe Concerning PLC information besides the relay link area when you have set information of different regions onto the same sheet this will be perceived as the information of the currently connected region It is not possible to set PLC information onto the same sheet besides the Relay link area It is important to make active the sheet which will display the information of the co
87. 0 Fora Entire Range Number of regions Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 m Pulse Width Settings Timeout Settings Retry Jon z psec Interval fs x min Drive WJ Relay ON Time Work Folder C Program Fild I Modem Support File E Help H pee o ooo C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments 1 1 2 2 Ri vo 3 3 V2 V2 No R2 vo 4 4 vo vo No RO vo 5 5 vo vO No RO vo 6 6 vo vo No RO vo i 7 vo vo No RO vo 8 8 vo vo No RO vo O99 9 VO vo No RO vo E 10 10 10 VO vo No RO vo O 11 11 11 VO vo No RO vo O 12 12 12 VO vo No RO vo O 13 13 13 VO vo No RO vo O 14 14 14 VO vo No RO vo O is 15 15 VO vo No RO vo O 1616 16 VO vo No RO vo El av av ay vo vo No RO vo O 18 18 18 VO vo No RO vo x When the PLC makes a phone line connection PCWAY reacts by performing the processes given below 1 Receive phone call When the phone call is received from the PLC if the Event to confirm the connection turns on within the Waiting time to confirm the connection connection is made If it does not turn on connection is not made Also if a check is placed in the Event automatically turn on check box connection is made Reads the read register Reads three words of the PLC data at the read register set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the All Settings
88. 0 characters 3 Read Input the formula when you will perform an operation to the value X which will be read Up to 80 characters 4 Write Input the formula when you will perform an operation and then write the cell value X Up to 80 characters Mic Specification of formula e Inputting the device when PLC1 word node number device name when PLC2 words W node number device name when the node is This will be equivalent to the node number of the information settings of which each of the No s has been specified device name DT data register WR Internal Relay LD link data register WX External Input FL file register WY External Output SV timer counter setting value WL Link Relay EV timer counter elapsed value dt special data register m data link area EXAMPLE 13DT10 node number 13 no 10 of the data register W15DT30 node number 15 uses2 words of no 30 31 of the data register LD20 node number the node is of the node of Cell Settings no 20 of the link register e Formula usable addition subtraction multiplication division modulus parenthesis negative value INT integer lt gt lt gt comparative equal not equal OR amp amp AND exponential SQR square root In natural log log logarithm e Formula of which operations cannot be performed Operations of which the answer is 0 0 division 0
89. 1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Arguments As Integer Argument4 As Byte Argument5 As Integer Argument6 As Integer As Long Argumenti f COM Port No 1 5 GT USB 0 Specify 1 to use the same port as PCWAY or USB Argument2 PLC Station No Argument3 SLOT No Argument4 Read Flag 0 Not Read 1 Read Argument5 Start Address No 0 1023 Argument6 f Read Number 1 1024 Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Other You should get the area data of 256 array in Argument 4 and 5 6 This function only store the data value in internal memory of PCWAYLOGGER When you would like to display the data value you have to paste function after copy to clipboard Ya EXAMPLE This sample displays on the cell A1 the data that read 200 word from the address 100 in 0 255 even number bank of the slot 1 in PLC Unit No 1 Dim bReadFlag 0 To 255 As Byte Dim iStartAddress 0 To 255 As Integer Dim iReadCount 0 To 255 As Integer Dim lugReturn As Long Dim iLoopcnt As Integer For iLoopcnt 0 To 255 If iLoopent 0 Then bReadFlag iLoopcnt 1 Elself iLoopcnt Mod 2 0 Then bReadFlag iLoopcent 1 Else bReadFlag iLoopcnt 0 End If If bReadFlag iLoopent 1 Then iStartAddress iLoopcnt 100 iReadCount iLoopcnt 200 End If Next iLoopent lugReturn Application Run PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemory 1 1 1 bReadFlag iStartAddress i
90. 1 Browse W Start Condition OFF gt ON C ON gt OFF Informing Event y 0 Initialize by sheet name Sheet Name Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H 4 The Start Condition specifies whether or not the next specified informing event is to be turned on when the status of the Trigger specified at changes and the manner in which it changes 5 Set the event which you would like to turn ON according to the former Start Condition at Informing Event 6 Input a simple comment 7 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 9 Weekly Timer e Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt WeeklyTimer W e Click Based on the clock of the computer the bit device will turn ON by pulse or level at the specified time and day a g Weekly Timer 00 00 wo Joan b Ww NW Be PRR RPRP RH Anu bwWN He H H ao o PRPERPRPP RPP BP BPP PPR PP ee 19 Item Explanations 1 Execute Select whether to execute the chosen number at No or not 2 Specified Time Set the time when you would like to turn the device ON Set by 24 hours 3 Specified Day Checks the date when the device will be turned to ON 4 Node Select
91. 20 300 130 Current Value 110 400 140 500 150 New Value 600 160 Input Range MIN 700 170 800 180 MAX 900 190 I Continuous Change cnt _ There can be a number of reasons why the Register Contents Correction dialogbox does not emerge Please consult the following to fix this e Erroneous settings under Cell Settings Target is not set to Register Select Register and if any other items need to be changed correct the Settings of those items as well Attribute is set to Read Only Select either Read Write or Write Only For more details on setting new values refer to 4 1 2 Setting the cell information Concerning Setting refer to 5 1 Cell Settings Convert the Relay status Double click the cell where you would like to change the ON OFF of the Relay The Relay Operation dialog box will be displayed By clicking OK the current relay status will change variously depending on what has been set Level operation The current relay status will change from ON to OFF and OFF to ON Pulse Operation Regardless of the current relay status if you turn the relay to ON it will automatically change to OFF after a certain period of time ON operation Regardless of the current relay status the relay will always turn to ON OFF operation Regardless of the current relay status the relay will always turn to OFF El Microsoft Excel Book1 Iz File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data
92. 3 As String Argument 4 As Integer Argument 5 As Long As Long Argument 1 PLC Station No Argument 2 Device Code WR WL DT SV EV LD FL IC Argument 3 Device No If you access IC card please design by Hexadecimal Argument 4 File Register FL Bank No FL in FP2SH 0 1 2 Else 1 Argument 5 Number of words Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Others This function only store the data value in internal memory of PCWAY LOGGER When you would like to display the data value you have to paste function after copy to clipboard In case of Ethernet uses Ethernet Local of PCWAY Register the destinations to Ethernet Local of Communication Settings e Download data to the continuous area in PLC Except Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadEX Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As String Argument 5 As Integer Argument 6 As Long Argument 7 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadEX2 Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As String Argument 5 As Integer Argument 6 As Long Argument 7 As Integer As Long Argument 1 f COM Port No 1 15 GT USB 0 Specify 1 to use the same port as PCWAY or USB Argument 2 PLC Station No
93. 6 16 VO vo No Ee a a7 17 WO vo No 0 18 18 18 VO vo No All Settings A 3 8 Ethernet Local Remote Connection e Understand registration of IP address for a personal computer very well the ET LAN unit and Ethernet to use the Ethernet communication Prior to using an ET LAN unit especially match a configuration of a personal computer to configurations of PLCs after understanding descriptions in ET LAN instruction manual very well PLCs are sure to require a program for specifying IP address e The number of PLCs connecting with a personal computer via Ethernet counts up to 64 In use of an ET LAN unit however a personal computer occupying one connection number decreases the number of PLCs able to connect to maximum 63 e To start internal procedure of POWAY such as the File Processing the Auto Macro Startup and the Sound Startup by PLCs turning on the relay each relay of PLCs must be perceived as the relay link area M with C NET Settings of PCWAY The equipment is connected physically via Ethernet but register with C NET Settings The Ethernet connection has two types 3 8 1 Ethernet Local On Ethernet Local PCWAY connects the PC and PLC as soon as executing Use the Ethernet local connection ordinarily for full time communication The connection has two types Not using each link path of MEWNET e Example of Hardware lt Ethemet Max 64 PLCs can be connected Even if using one E
94. 7 Ver8 0 Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel Ver 2002 Microsoft Excel Ver 2003 Microsoft Excel Ver 2007 Microsoft Excel 2010 installed e Others The MEWNET H link software or the MEWNET H setting software is necessary according to the network type which will connect with the PLC Attachment of the key unit The format of the connecting varies by the key unit type IBM PC AT compatible USB Universal Serial Bus port direct connection type Connecting method USB port of the personal computer key unit The USB port is monopolized The USB cable cannot be connected to the edge of the key unit Gag eNote This cannot be used unless there is the environment where the USB device can be used at the personal computer For further information please refer to each of the manuals of the corresponding personal computer SS 1 3 1 2 Version Up from Ver1 or Ver2 Usually when you installed PCWAY PCWAY automatically converts to new files from the old files of PCWAY But executes below when the work folder of PCWAY is 2 or more 1 There is W_TCcvt exe in the new PCWAY install folder Copy W_TCcvt exe to the work folders of the old version 2 Execute W_TCcvt exe in the work folders of the old version 1 3 Installing 1 Verify whether Windows and Microsoft Excel has been installed or not If Windows and Microsoft Excel has not been installed please make sure that those are in
95. 80 sec Default value 60 Ethernet Remote e Overview Use the Ethernet remote connection only if necessary for communication with PLC Communication starts when either Turning on the event V or Informing error from PLC to PCWAY Usually PLCs are not connected to PCWAY Use Remote connection when user structured system is mainly as follows Example 1 PIR EEIEIEE so cas sa Max 254 PLCs Line A Line B Line C But 63 PLCs are available if ET LAN unit of PLC is used _ eee ees a oe eee eee ee Only one remote PLC can access PCWAY on each line e Form of connection The Remote connection has three types Send Line Connecting to PLCs from PCWAY There are two types of Regular Connection method a method of connection which must be manually cut and One Scan Connection method a method of connection which be automatically cut off after scanning over PLCs The automatical link connection can be also applied to all destinations entered with the One Scan Connection method Reception Connecting to PCWAY from PLC PCWAY can be connecting until specifying wait time Error Reception Connecting to PCWAY from PLC As soon as receiving an error PCWAY automatically cuts off line after only required processing e Setting method Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Operation Preferences D or click the Icon button Be in the Tools bar Following Ope
96. AY e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Exit PCWAY F e Click e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift C Finish the communication with the PLC The operating of the monitor is no longer possible 5 8 Read PCWAY Settings Again e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Read PCWAY Settings Again G e Click The registered data will be re read if you have changed the contents such as Cell Settings or Character Change during the running of the monitor However if you change the registered contents at Operation Preferences or Connection No this will not be reflected Please re start PCWAY 5 9 Start Monitor e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Start Monitor R e Click e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift D Start the monitor for the cell after the information setting has been done with it The contents of what has been displayed onto the cell will change depending on what is changed with the relay or register value of the PLC When you have made changes with each registered data perform Read PCWAY Settings Again before the starting of the monitor However it is necessary to re start PCWAY when you have made any changes to Operation Preferences or to the Connection No 5 10 Stop Monitor e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Stop Monitor S e Click Hi e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift E Stop the running of the monitor The contents of what will be displayed onto the cell will not change e
97. B e PCWAY might not operate correctly when there are a several other programs added in to Microsoft Excel Please make sure to remove the Add In programs e Booting Microsoft Excel more than once and beginning monitoring on two or more Microsoft Excel programs is not permitted e Please attach the key unit which is included inside the package Without this being attached PCWAY will not operate 2 5 2 Operations of PCWAY e Only the data of a currently active sheet can be updated for instance the PLC information which has been set on to the Microsoft Excel cell or the file data Concerning the sheet which is not currently active the displaying will not be updated When you would like to save the contents of a current book it is necessary to update all of the sheets For further information refer to 5 12 Update All Sheet Data e When you happen to delete or insert an Microsoft Excel row column or a cell during the running of the monitor it is possible that the PLC data and the relay display position might shift a little It is necessary to stop the monitor first and then perform the deleting or the inserting e When each of the registered contents or the matters which have been set before have been ul changed unless you select the Click Read PCWAY Settings Again it is not possible to operate the changed contents e For the settings below it is necessary to re start PCWAY after you have finished this or e
98. B gt From 1 7 Word c Yes ___ _ UR en From 1 word ia No C Yes Node 17 je o Fromj 1 7 Word lr E Po Fives Node 17 ja o Fromj 1 7 Vora M nl 5 When you would like to change the number at No use the scroll bar on the very right EHIC NET Settings File E Help H C NET No toi Comment Comment Setcang zane _ range Execute Relay link range PCWAY _ eI C No Er Yes Node 1 gt fur I From 1 Word No firr No irr a a en O No irr ae No hir It is possible to register from No 1 to 600 6 When all of the settings have been completed save the file and finish 6 12 Auto Macro Startup e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Auto Macro Startup A e Click Uy Auto Macro Startup x File E Help H No Trigger C NET No Relay Event Macro Name 2 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 3 MO 1 1 RO vo o 4 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 5 HO 1 1 RO vo o 6 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 7 MO 1 1 RO vo o 8 amp 8 MO t 1 RO vo o 9 MO 1 1 RO vo Oo 10 MO 1 1 RO vo o 11 MO 1 1 RO vo o 12 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 13 MO 1 1 RO vO o 14 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 15 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 16 MO 1 1 RO vO o 17 MO 1 1 RO vo oO 18 MO 1 1 RO vo O 19 mO 1 1 RO vo xl Details D Uy Auto Macro Startup y No 1 1 Execute Yes 2 Trigger n z o C NET No 1 Browse W 3 5 Informing Relay M Notify Node 1 hg Relay R 0 6 gt Informing Event M Notify y
99. ByVal Argument 1 as String ByVal Argument 2 as Integer As Integer Argument 1 Event no Example For V21 the argument is 21 Argument 2 1 ON 0 OFF Return value 0 Normal Any other value Error Example To turn V21 on Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncEventWrite 21 1 e Processing for double click operation Function PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry Example When cell D5 is clicked Range D5 Select Call Application Run PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry m Attention point on use With PCWAY add in programs procedures are executed automatically when an event takes place When the properties of the procedures below are changed the PCWAY Add In program will not operate correctly Please be careful Procedure various kinds of settings With Application OnSheetActivate PCWAYsubAutoSheet Sheet activate On DoubleClick PCWAYsubDoubleClick Double click OnData PCWAYsubDDEAddinEvents DDE Link DisplayNotelndicator True Memo mark ActiveCell NoteText MEW Memo ScreenUpdating True Screen display renewal End With Event procedure relation function Sheet data notice processing Sub PCWAYsubAutoSheet Double click processing Sub PCWAYsubDoubleClick Cell input processing Sub PCWAYsubCellEntry DDE Event arrival of the post processing Sub PCWAYsubDDEAddinEvents ag eNoTe Attention when you use PCWAYsubDoubleClick of Event procedure relation function into Micr
100. C NET RS 232C as an example 1 Select Various Types of Records O gt C NET Settings N and set RO to RF as the relay link MO to MF By doing so with the turning ON of the RO of the PLC it is possible to have PCWAY recognize MO turning to ON It is not possible to have RO recognized as the trigger at this point When connected with C NET RS 232C it is necessary to registering at C NET Settings 2 If you would like to have the trigger turn to on when the input XO has turned on it is necessary to have a program at the PLC as of the figure below XO R100 RO HDF RO The trigger here is RO With PCWAY by the prior 1procedures it is possible to have this recognized as MO After XO has turned ON and having RO turn ON this will be put to self hold PCWAY will receive that RO has turned to ON MO turning ON and will start the internal treatment file processing etc By registering the R100 as the informing relay at each of the registering menus of the various types of internal treatment the following will happen After the internal treatment has finished and PCWAY has turned R100 to ON after a certain pulse width initial value 5 010msec POWAY will confirm that RO has turned OFF and then PCWAY will next turn OFF R100 When trigger RO does not turn OFF although the informing relay R100 has turned to ON due to a problem of the program at the PLC side R100 will not turn to OFF As described above for the PLC side
101. C NET RS232C ODEM MEWNET H Ne Corneto 1 Ethernet Local Communication Setting Operz Ethernet Remote C Program F For connected PLCs click check reserved node number See detail explanation on 6 16 Connection No button to activate Connection No and then Communication Setting Operation Preferences x Network type Ethemet Local 7 m Computer Cancel I Acquire IP address automatically IP address 128 1 1 10 Initialize First port No 1025 0 1025 32704 Help Station No 64 1 64 Use LinkUnit Station Number Destination station No Destination IP address Destination pi Communication Time out Sec Connection Time out Sec Computer Acquire IP address automatically This function is the same as IP address setting of Windows Network If PCWAY executes this function gets IP address from Windows Then PCWAY executes various processing by using the IP address IP Address Source IP Address obtained automatically is displayed If displayed modify the property of TCP IP at the Network Setting in the Control Panels of each OS Different setting methods depend on each OS See detail explanation in the manual or the online help of each OS First Port No Enter the port number within 0 and the range from 1025 to 32767 Default value 0 If you set 0 in the First Port No you can t use Full passive
102. DEAddinEvents J s NoTe Attention when you use PCWAYsubDoubleClick of Event procedure relation function into Microsoft Excel Macro Use PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry when you want to use PCWAYsubDoubleClick Ex Operating ON OFF the relay of Microsoft Excel Cell B2 Range B2 Select Call Application Run PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry 4 3 3 Register the macro which will start automatically When you have created the macro by setting Auto Macro Startup 2 itis possible to start automatically the macro which you have created It is possible to set the relay link area M and the event V as the trigger which will start the macro For further information refer to 6 12 Auto Macro Startup Informing the trigger of the automatically starting macro Auto Macro Startup will be started by the trigger turning to ON This trigger is equivalent to the relay relay link M or the event V By determining the time when to turn the trigger to ON it is possible to start the macro at various timings e Start the macro starting at a certain interval by setting Interval Timer which enables the event to turn to ON at a certain interval e Start the macro at a specified time of the specified date by setting Weekly Timer which enables the event to turn to ON at a specified time of the specified date e Create a program with the PLC which will turn ON the relay link when the number of production has reached it s goa
103. DEM MEWNET H No Connection Ethernet Remote Communication Setting Operation Ethernet Local h C Program File For connected PLCs click button to activate Connection No and then check reserved node number See detail explanation on 6 16 Connection No First check Use Link Unit Station Number Network type Ethemet Local Computer Cancel I Acquire IP address automatically IP address 128 1 1 10 Initialize First port No 1025 01025 32704 Help Station No E Ba JV Use LinkUnit Station Number m Destination IP address 128 1 1 2 Port No 1025 1 32767 Station tao 1 1 64 Communication Time out Sec 5 v Connection Time out Sec 60 X Computer Acquire IP address automatically This function is the same as IP address setting of Windows Network If PCWAY executes this function gets IP address from Windows Then PCWAY executes various processing by using the IP address IP Address Source IP Address obtained automatically is displayed If it does not displayed modify the property of TCP IP at Network setting in Control Panels of each OS Different setting methods depend on each OS See detail explanation in a manual or the online helps of each OS First Port No Enter the port number within 0 and the range from 1025 to 32767 Default Value 0 Enter the first port number of fol
104. Delete button Then the message box asking you May delete the registered Data will appear Then click Yes button e Option Permitted Reception Mail Address Setting Mails with the addresses registered here can be received When selecting Permitted Reception Mail Address Setting from Option in E mail Setting dialog box the following dialog box will appear E mail Setting Permitted Reception Mail Address Setti When you place a check mark in the Uses the permitted reception check box only e mails with the addresses that have been registered previously are received When acheck mark is not placed in the check box this function does not work even if there are some registered addresses In other words all messages set for PCWAY are received Registering a new address To register a new address place a check mark in the Uses the permitted reception check box and click L button Then the following dialog box will appear Enter the necessary information in the Address field Then click button xi Warne Address ESSUS9ser mp4 Only the Address field is active Changing the registered address Clicking _2 _ button displays the following dialog box Change the registered address into a new one Hame Address EeGUJJ AAi Deleting the registered address Select the registered address that you wish to delete and click _ Delete button Then the message box asking you
105. E a E EESE 6 25 6 3 Message iie i eana aAa EEn sala ATA ae PENA AKETE UEa VANA shed cheats eda TUKEEN WAMA WS 6 31 OA Operation Form lacon s en an a a eae T AT 6 38 6 5 EE S EE 6 44 6 6 File Proc ssiNg eierpasta at aE EA NETES ESN ANNAE 6 50 6 7 Fil Trigger ienr nrin nN Aan EA AE AA EEA AA ENEA ASE 6 57 6 8 Event Stant p yricscacasstaeasa aoaea aana 6 62 6 9 Weekly TIMET se toe ten eraen a a aai Ta p a ae NA SE i 6 67 6 10 Interval TINE erinnern Se ae rete ree ER T 6 71 6 11 C NET Settings gienen tasien ERa EAEE dew ents EtA EAER Eais EEUE ES 6 75 6 12 Auto Macro Startup ssssssserseererssrrrrrrrrsrrrrrrrsrrrrrrtrrersrrrtrrrtenrrerrreennrene 6 79 6 13 SOUNG StartUD k arenema n aA A ee 6 83 6 14 Modem SUpport sexe a sceavocasdodetanesiedebons dedebenadaddhenenededeadeuzesu steed EEEE ENESE 6 88 6 15 Application Slant UDinvecssecccesteeseiant cesatec tees act msn ante atact fee artes atest acteecs ts 6 97 GO Connection ING 4 ste ae aed ieee ein ees ee eaated 6 101 6 17 Ethernet Remote i isnt aierua oea earne eaea Ea NAOn EE IEA EDEN 6 104 6 18 E mail Setting aes hs Ae aN i cee rh aia rrer dis 6 111 vi 7 Overview List for ReEfCrence cceccececeececenceceeceaceceeceneecenceas 7 1 7 1 Notation method of the Memory area in POWAY cceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 7 2 T2 Usefilenam NSE criera aeaeged can nega R A R wena tues 7 3 7 3 Incorporation macro MAME IIS lisse sese sessiesepeseieseseseseseseseassesea
106. EA Microsoft Excel Booki File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY amea ma a sev Rd aS De Be Oe i mma C2 hd Current Value 110 400 140 500 150 New Value 600 160 Input Range MIN 700 170 800 180 MAX 900 190 IV Continuous Change cos e f the movement mode of the cell is in the No Action H m position the Continuous Change message window will be displayed At this point it is important not to ignore the setting of the cell movement mode to either Downward F piz or To the righ F B m Click OK set the movement mode of the cell and then execute once again the matters instructed above at No 1 Continuous Change x AN First select Downward or To The Right using Cell settings Refer to 5 5 Set Cell Order on how to do the setting 2 By clicking OK after the changing of the register the cells will automatically move towards the selected direction specified at the Set Cell Order With this change the register value How to download data Download to the PLC the values where the range has been specified already 1 Specify the cell range where Attribute of the information setting is set as Write only Target _ Attribute Relay Read Only Register le Data C ReadjWrite Event Connection Connection Settings Node No Device Code or Data Register z Device No fo Display Metho
107. File Processing l OOmsec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 OOmsec LLL Vv f Permit the vV Receive connection Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 100 Error Reception j 0 lv anaia Communication ae Settings A Foia Entire Range m Timeout Settings Pulse Width Settings Retry oN z Relay ON Time 1 OOmsec Interval s z min ial Ba Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY Drive W Enter settings for Information Relay and Information Event as necessary A setting must always be entered for Read Register and a check mark must be placed by No 1 in the Connection No list Ee Operation Preferences X EF Connection No MODEM Over 65 Regions Fie Help Node 1 e l 0 Informin Comment Informing Event V Inform y o Check node number you want to connect Eo EES A SS SS SB Be o fed no Bon Ief ap Read Register Node l DT 0 eB o eons leo leew zeJ 29 az 33 a a ar 37 38 39 Connection No P az 43 44 asf sef 47 sr 49 sof s f s2y s3 Sa ss sr er sef 59 6 amp 4 es sef 67 7AT POES go EF ea esf sef 87 oat f sefi 97 ss 69 oom moe moe S00 Gau Esa ees mo mo Be ce gl ssf 89 BaeBeBeBeReeeee BEeBeeeREeEeee r r con fos lees feed r r r Son 939 For detailed information refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences If there are fewer than 65 regions
108. Fis Field Copy Copy source No Copy destination No Amount of address increase Execute Cancel Registering kA File Processing x File E Edit E Field Copy C Help H Execution No Comment Specify corresponding file File No ione z Reference 1 Choose the execution number which you would like to register Left click Execution No and choose the number It is not possible to choose several numbers of the File No located under Specify corresponding file for the same Execution No When the file of Specify corresponding file will be changed make sure to register a different number for Execution No Beware that the file number of Execution No and Specify corresponding file is always of a 1 1 relationship 2 Next input a comment After inputting a comment when you would like to display this comment after the right after the number do as the following Select different temporary number and then return to the former area By doing so the inputted comment will be displayed after the Otherwise do the saving procedures from File located in the menu bar 3 When performing this file processing place a check mark at the Yes check box When there is no check mark this file processing will not be executed although the Trigger device turns to ON e Specify corresponding file Specification of the file created at File Master Rasen corresponding file File No i
109. Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Update Active Sheet Data U e Click E e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift e Without PCWAY being started it is not possible to use Update Active Sheet Data e With Update Active Sheet Data the displaying of the PLC relay and the register information event information file data and the connection conditions will be updated Tasks such as changing the color of the chart of which has been displayed on to the Microsoft Excel sheet by the macro will not be performed here 5 14 Save Excel file By using Save Excel File the settings of Cell Settings at the corresponding book will be erased and the following will be added to the file name and will be saved File name before the saving and YYYYMMDDHHMMSS year month day hour minute second The file name will be saved in the folder of which the corresponding book has been opened When the corresponding book is that of what has been just newly created this will be saved in to the PCWAY work folder After the book has been saved into the PCWAY work folder the performances will be done automatically until the former book is redisplayed It is possible to start the Microsoft Excel file saving by one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Save Excel File Q e Click e Shortcut key Ctrl E 5 15 Save HTML File By using Save HTML File the settings of Cell Settings at the corresponding bo
110. Ik Seer onc aa ae aa AEE TGR Bee a E aa se a a Baek BEER IGN Ie ane eB EEET a ogee BEET IGEESICEE Gur lcessc ne EEEEST n A a e nN E a a T D4000 D4FFF DF000 DFFFF 6 9 IRQ No Refer to the chart below IRQ No SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Input 3 ON ON ON OFF IRQ3 emer gt SR len oe n eo ere Won lone haga meal ieee ene cee neces a o E Zt eae SEE ee o E wae GEeT H T 15 ON ON OFF ON IRQI5 Timeout At the Operation preferences Communication Settings dialog box specify MEWNET H Then at Timeout then specify the expiration time of the communication time with your PLC Set with each 1 second within the 1 to 60 second range C NET RS232C Select this when the personal computer and a number of PLCs are connected by 1 N through the C NET adapter when the personal computer and the PLC is connected by 1 1 through RS232C then it is necessary to select this Set to the same settings as the communication conditions of the PLC For example when using FP1 match to the value which has been set at System Register No 412 to 415 1 Set to System Register 412 K1 Purpose of usage 2 System Register 413 Transmission format 15 6 543 2 1 0 TATA 0 Data Length 0 7bit 1 8bit 2 1 Parity 0 0 Invalid l 0 1 Valid odd 1 1 Valid even 3 Stop Bit 0 1bit 1 2bit 5 4 Terminal code 00 CR
111. LC will be considered to be disconnected Inform PLC of phone line connection To inform the connected status to the PLC at node number 1 the informing relay for the PLC at node number 1 is turned off and then on By this relay turning on the PLC can verify the status of the phone line connection The informing relay is set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions O button for Number of regions in the Operations Preferences dialog box However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Informing Relay PLC node number becomes 0 You can also set the informing relay by clicking the Connection No P button at the dialog box and then placing a check at node number 1 Since it is possible that an error could have occurred at the PLC leaving the informing relay on from the last phone line connection it is first turned off and then on again The duration the informing relay is turned off can be set at Relay ON Time for Pulse Width Settings in the Operation Preferences dialog box 7 PLC surveillance First the relay link area set with C NET Settings is checked If a relay link area that is on is set as a trigger the corresponding internal processing file processing etc will be carried out Then the currently active Microsoft Excel
112. ML File possible to specify file name Function PCWAYfncHTMLFileSaveNameType__ Argument 1 As String Argument 2 As Integer As String Argumenti Specified file name File expansion htm is not included When you registered only the file name the HTML file is saved to the same folder as the Microsoft Excel book file Argument2 0 Saves the original book 1 Original book is not saved It is O in the case of omission Return value File name which was saved Folder name accompaniment e Operation Preferences e Character Change e Message e Operation Formula e File Master e File Processing e File Trigger e Event Startup e Weekly Timer e Interval Timer e C NET Settings e Auto Macro Startup e Sound Startup e Application Startup e Modem Support e Application Startup e Ethernet Remote e E mail Setting e Help display e Compile Sub PCWAYsubShellEnvironUpdate Sub PCWAYsubShellDisplayChange Sub PCWAYsubShellMessage Sub PCWAYsubShellCalc Sub PCWAYsubShellFileMaster Sub PCWAYsubShellFileLog Sub PCWAYsubShellFileTrigger Sub PCWAYsubShellEventTrigger Sub PCWAYsubShellWeeklyTimer Sub PCWAYsubShelllntervalTimer Sub PCWAYsubShellCNetEntry Sub PCWAYsubShellEventMacro Sub PCWAYsubShellSound Sub PCWAYsubShellRunExec Sub PCWAYsubShellModem Sub PCWAYsubShellRunExec Sub PCWAYsubShellEthernet Sub PCWAYsubShellEMail Sub PCWAYsubHelpDisp Sub PCWAYsubCompile Internal treatment function e Confirm the current
113. MyAppSetEventState Lib W_MCRDPC dll Alias W_MCRDPC_W_sEventWrite ByVal strEventNo As String ByVal intMode As Integer As Integer Sub Macro1 Dim IntEventState As Integer Reads status of V19E IntEventState MyAppGetEventState 19E amp Chr 0 If 1 IntEventState Then V19E is on Turns V19E off If 0 MyAppSetEventState 19E amp Chr 0 0 Then MsgBox Turned V19E off Else MsgBox The event number specified at the argument is invalid End lf Else If 0 IntEventState Then V19E is off Turns V19E on If 0 MyAppSetEventState 19E amp Chr 0 1 Then MsgBox Turned V19E on Else MsgBox The event number specified at the argument is invalid End If Else MsgBox The event number specified at the argument is invalid End If End Sub e Applicable information DLL Uses w_mecrdpc dll Since it is using the same DLL as PCWAY make sure to use the program that uses this function from the same directory that PCWAY is executed from 7 4 5 Obtaining the Status of All Events VC Function PCWAYapiEventAllRead e Function Obtain the status of all events e Construction short FAR PASCAL PCWAYapiEventAllRead short psEventNo Event numbers VO to V99F e Parameter psEventNo Specifies the short form 1600 piece arrangement 1 is stored for this variable when the event is on and 0 is stored when the event is off e Explanation The 1600 0 to 1599 events VO to V99F are prepared 99F
114. NET Settings The settings at C NET Settings is necessary only with the modem even when the networks of each of the regions are connected with MEWNET H C NET C NET C NET Modem Adapter Adapter Adapter Region No 1 Node2 C NET C NET C NET C NET 2 Modem Adapter Adapter Adapter Region No Node1 Node2 Node3 Modem Region No 3 Node3 In order to connect as the upper figure set as the followings introduced to you next Setting Operation Preferences Run Operation Preferences and set the information introduced below Communication Click on the satena te button under Network Select Modem under Network Type Enter the correct settings for the COM Port Baud Rate Data Length Stop Bit and Parity parameters and enter setting for the Timeout and Public Line Timeout parameters Check Pulse if a dial type line is being used no check is necessary if a Tone push type line is being used Enter a setting for the Modem Init command AT command Erase the check mark from Over 65 Regions under Number of Regions If this check mark is not erased the Modem Support 0 button will not be displayed ER Operation Preferences x File E Settings C Help H Communication Setting Operation Preferences IC Type p Network C NET RS232C OOmsec COM port MODEM MODEM MEWNET H __ Lancet oOmsec 7 No Connection te ali Ethernet Loc
115. OGGER When you would like to display the data value you have to paste function after copy to clipboard e Upload data from continuous area in PLC Except Ethernet Function PCWAYLoggerfncUpload Argument 1 As Integer Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As String Argument 4 As String Argument 5 As Integer Argument 6 As Long As Long Argument 1 Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument 4 Argument 5 Argument 6 Return Value COM Port No 1 5 GT USB 0 Specify 1 to use the same port as PCWAY or USB PLC Station No Device Code WR WL DT SV EV LD FL IC Device No If you access IC card please design by Hexadecimal File Register FL Bank No FL in FP2SH 0 1 2 Else 1 Number of words 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Others This function is necessary to keep the compatible with old version This function only store the data value in internal memory of PCWAY LOGGER When you would like to display the data value you have to paste function after copy to clipboard e Upload data from extension area in PLC Except Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemory Argumenti As Integer Argument2 As Integer Argument3 As Integer Argument4 As Byte Argument5 As Integer Argument6 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemory2 Argument
116. Panasonic Operation Data Managing Software PCWAY User s Manual ARCT1F392E 7 2013 7 panasonic net id pidsx global Safety Precautions Read and understand this specifications instruction manual installation manual and catalog to make proper use of the product WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Do not play the accompanying disk on an audio CD player or speakers of a personal computer It could lead to the injury of your ears or the damage to the speakers due to mega volume Copyright Trademarks You may use this software in accordance with the Licensing terms for the software This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Windows Windows NT and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd and Xerox Corp All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PCWAY PREFACE We appreciate your purchase of our software product This User s Manual is published to tell beginners about setup and operating outline of the product Please understand a content of this booklet very well to use the product correctly In add
117. ReadCount If lugReturn 0 Then Call Application Run PCWAYLoggersubClipCopy 200 ActiveSheet Range A1 Select ActiveSheet Paste ActiveSheet Range A1 Select End lf Wc e Download data to extension area in PLC Except Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadMemory Argument1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Arguments As Integer Argument4 As Byte Argument5 As Integer Argument6 As Integer Argument7 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadMemory2 Argument1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Arguments As Integer Argument4 As Byte Argument5 As Integer Argument 6 As Integer Argument7 As Integer As Long Argument1 COM Port No 1 5 GT USB 0 Specify 1 to use the same port as PCWAY or USB Argument2 PLC Station No Argument3 SLOT No Argument4 Write Flag O Not Write 1 Write Argument5 Start Address No 0 1023 Argument6 Write Number 1 1024 Argument7 Write Data Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Other You should get the area data of 256 array in Argument 4 and 5 6 EXAMPLE ooo This sample writes 200 word area to the address 100 in 0 255 even number bank of the slot 1 in PLC Unit No 1 after getting the data of 200 column of 128 line on the cell A1 Returns to
118. S File Trigger x No l 1 Execute Trigger C NET No 1 Browse W Node p Relay R n Informing Relay Informing Event Executing Message PageUp U PageDown D Help H 3 Itis possible to specify C NET No when the Network Type is specified as Modem at Operation Preferences C NET Settings will be displayed after clicking the Browse command button With this by going to File of C NET Settings gt Select current No and finish the number will be selected and will return to the File Processing dialog box Concerning the registering details 6 11 C NET Settings x No Execute NV Yes Trigger fu o C NET No E Browse W Informing Relay M Notify Node p Relay R o Informing Event NV Notify v p Executing Message PageUp U PageDown D p Help H 4 After performing the file processing if there is a relay and event which you would like to turn ON do the settings for each Informing relay and Informing event You must specify Informing relay when M Relay link has been selected at Trigger x No ea Execute V Yes Trigger fu o C NET No iz Browse WJ Informing Relay M Notify Node 1 Relay JR 0 Informing Event V Notify v Executing Message PageUp U PageDown D Help H 5 Input the message which you would like to display during the file processing at Executing Message 6 60 6 To exit this screen when all of the set
119. SZEUE button and do the communication settings for the modem for the receiving of an error Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error EG Network type Moom g COM port E x Cancel Baud rate 39600 z bps Initial Initialize Data length C 7bitt 8bits Help rm Stop bit 1 bit f 2bits Parity Non C Odd Even Dial mode Puse Tone C Others eror Time out 10 vj sec Public Line Time out feo x sec Modem Command 4T Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 4 4 Number of regions e When the number of regions is under 65 the setting of the Modem Support dialog box becomes valid For detailed information 6 14 Modem Support e When the number of regions is over 65 Over 65 Regions 0 x i then place a check mark at the button and do the settings at this dialog box E Operation Preferences x MODEM Over 65 Regions Informing Relay VV Node 1 Jr gt o Informing Event V Inform vj o Read Register Node l DT l 0 Connection No iP meno mney Informing Relay Do the settings here if there is a relay which you wish to turn on after the line is connected by PCWAY This will turn off after the line is severed The registerable node number is limited to node number 1 Informing Event Do the settings here if there is an event which you wish to turn on after the line is connected by PCWAY
120. Specified error of execution flag 3 Specified error of interval time Example Execute the interval timer processing of No 1 at every 3 second interval Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncSetIntervalChange 1 0 3 e Processing for obtaining the event number status Function PCWAYfncEventRead ByVal Argument 1 as String As Integer Argument 1 Event no Example For V21 the argument is 21 Return value 0 OFF 1 ON Example To obtain the status of event V21 Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncEventRead 21 If intRet is 1 the event is on and if 0 the event is off e Processing for setting the event number status Function PCWAYfncEventWrite ByVal Argument 1 as String ByVal Argument 2 as Integer As Integer Argument 1 Event no Example For V21 the argument is 21 Argument 2 1 ON 0 OFF Return value 0 Normal Any other value Error Example To turn V21 on Dim intRet as Integer intRet Application Run PCWAYfncEventWrite 21 1 M EXAMPLE Usages of the functions for PCWAY e The following example describes the changing of the sheet using the press button When using PCWAYsubAutoSheet for the changing of the sheet with the macro make sure to inform the Add in program that the sheet has been changed Sub Command 1_Click Sheets Sheet1 Select Sheet Change Call Application Run PCWAYsubAutoSheet inform the Sheet changing End Sub
121. Station Number Do not check it Use LinkUnit Station Number Destination station No Destination IP address Destination pi Method of enter and modify each setting for the destination Click a button to enter new contents for the destination Click Change button to modify contents which has already been entered Enter required contents in each field in following dialog box that is displayed Entry Destination Parameters x Cancel Station No 1 1 64 ea IP address P Port No 1025 1 32767 Computer port No 1025 When node numbers are displayed with the button au the smallest node number that is not reserved is automatically displayed Entered contents are sorted in ascending order of the node number Use ET LAN Unit Check it to connect a personal computer or HUB via our ET LAN unit Station No Enter the node number within the range from 1 to 64 Ensure however that the node number is not the same with the source station number Note In Connection No dialog box enter node numbers that has been specified here Not entered this node number becomes invalid IP Address Enter the IP address for destinations which you would like to access Port No Enter the port number within the range from 1 to 32767 Default value 1025 Enter the port number of following source station number If other programs run specify the first port number without repetition
122. T AN unit maximum 63 PLCs can connect That means a personal computer itself must have a node number See detailed explanation in ET LAN Unit Introduction Manual Connect PLC to HUB via our ET LAN unit or the Ethernet RS232C converter unit on the market When connecting Ethernet RS232C converter unit plug the RS232C cable into TOOL port or COM port of PLCs But connection to FP3 require the Ver 4 4 later converter corresponding to C NET Using each link path of MEWNET e Example of Hardware Using Tool port of CPU PCWAY Computer W lt Ethernet RS232C Converter Unit MEWNET H W Link Unit Check number 0 2 and 3 to enter the node number above Connect No 1 PLC with the node No 0 3 22 Using ET LAN Unit Ethemet MEWNET H W Link Unit ET LAN Unit Check number1 2 and 3 to enter the node number above No 1 Link Unit must set the CPU right side When you directly connect PCWAY and our ET LAN Unit Ethernet cable uses the crossing cable MEWNET H W P Link Unit uses nearest at the CPU place please J s NoTe Only top hierarchy level in each link unit of MEWNET can be connected while the second hierarchy level later cannot connected 3 8 2 Ethernet Remote Use the Ethernet remote connection only if necessary for communication with PLC Communication starts when either Turning on the event V or Informing error from PLC to PCWAY Usually PLCs are not
123. Te For the generation only up to the 3rd generation can be used When you are in need of a file revision other than this file revision besides the 1st 2nd and 3rd generation refer to 4 7 2 Controlling Files Using the Microsoft Excel Book Log 4 7 2 Controlling Files Using the Microsoft Excel Book Log The inconveniences when saving the Microsoft Excel book by File gt Save Although it is possible to save the Microsoft Excel book from the File menu potentially there will arise problems with this such as described below 1 PCWAY will only update the displaying of the sheet information of a currently active sheet Therefore if a sheet is not active right before it s saving the data will not be updated from what has been last displayed unless you have used only one sheet during the process 2 When you re open a formerly saved book and then start the monitor the data which has been saved before will be updated due to the current PLC information and etc This is because the PLC information and the cell are held still linked by the Cell Settings What to be careful of when saving the Microsoft Excel book As a solution for the prior matters it is necessary to follow the procedures introduced to you below before you save a particular book 1 When there happens to exist a several number of sheets in a book it is necessary to do the settings at Update All Sheet Data before saving the book Either
124. WAY ATVIEOSO 152 43 The node number for the remote PLC that will inform PCWAY of the error dial the phone is restricted to 1 e Using the public phone lines it is possible to connect to PCWAY from remote PLCs This basic functioning is opposite to that when connecting to remote PLCs from PCWAY Once PCWAY is connected to the public phone lines you are able to use all the functions provided with PCWAY Click the aa button for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box Choose MODEM for Network Type and properly set the communication settings a Operation Preferences x Communication Setting Operation Preferences IBM PC AT C NET RS232C MODEM MEWNET H No Connection Ethernet Local Ethernet A C Program Files PCWAY ATVIEOSO 1S2 43 J 4 74 eee Place a check in the Receive check box for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the button Perform the required reception settings in the dialog box that appears E P Operation Preferences IBM PC AT 4 For more details regarding the reception settings refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences 4 8 3 1 Surveillance of Remote PLCs Connection from PCWAY Operation of Phone Line Connection Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears For more d
125. Window Help PCWAY CEECEE B2 hd OFF A B E D E F Relay Operation q x 2 Change ON OFF state of relay EI cm Boon aoa ole If the Relay Operation dialog box does not emerge the following reasons can be considered e Erroneous settings under Cell Settings Target is not set to Relay Select Relay and if any other items need to be changed correct the settings of those items as well Attribute is set to Read Only Select Read Write or Write Only A check mark has not been placed next to ON OFF confirmation message by selecting Settings on the operation Preferences menu bar and then Option The system will operate correctly in this case For more details on the procedures refer to 4 1 2 Setting the cell information Concerning on more setting details refer to 5 1 Cell Settings Continuous Change Mode If the register value is lined up next to each other in the Row and Column of direction horizontal and vertical direction it is possible to make changes with the register value without going through the procedures of selecting only up to one cell at a time Concerning the moving direction of the cell or cells set the E fj e at the Set Cell Order 1 First double click the cell which you would like to change starting from the one that comes first The Register Contents Correction screen will be displayed Choose Continuous Change
126. Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows 98 98SE ME NT4 0 Microsoft Excel 2010 o 4 Microsoft Excel 2007 o 2 Microsoft Excel 2003 Microsoft Excel 2002 Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel 97 Microsoft Excel 95 1 Not operable on 64 bit Windows Vista and Windows XP 2 Microsoft Excel2007 is supported on Windows XP SP2 or later 3 Microsoft Excel2003 is supported on Windows 2000 SP3 or later 4 Microsoft Excel2010 is supported on Windows XP SP3 or later 8 8 Compatibility Between PCWAY and Each OS o Operable No guarantee of proper operation Not supported PCWAY products Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows 98 98SE ME NT4 0 Ver2 82 oO Ver2 7400 O Ver2 7000 Ver2 7300 o 1 Ver2 6 series o 1 Ver2 5 series o 1 Ver2 4 series o 1 Ver2 3 series o 2 o 1 Ver2 1 series O o 1 Key unit version 4 102 5 22 4 102 5 22 4 96 4 85 4 102 5 22 4 02 4 102 5 22 4 02 4 102 5 22 a Runs on Windows 95 as well 2 The PCWAY Ver2 33 and later versions support Windows XP However a difference file of the key driver is required It can be downloaded from our website 8 9 Correspondence Table between PCWAY and Microsoft Excel A Av
127. Y logger Returns the data stored with the PCWAY logger read function as return values Function PCWAYLoggersubGetDataEX as Variant Return value Read variant type array data akWwWN OoO When reading and inserting the PLC s file register of 1000 to 5000 words into the variable intData sequence using the COM port Dim intData As Variant Dim IngReturn As Long Dim IngLoop As Long IngReturn Application Run PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEX 1 0 FL 1000 1 5000 If IngReturn 0 Then intData Application Run PCWAYLoggersubGetDataEX Else MsgBox Read Error Exit Sub End If The obtainted data is displayed in a message box For IngLoop 0 To UBound intData If MsgBox intData intLoop voOKCancel voCancel Then Exit For End If Next IngLoop e Clear PCWAY LOGGER internal memory Sub PCWAYLoggersubMemoryClear e Execute Communication Settings for PCWAY LOGGER Function PCWAYLoggerfncShowParamSetDlg Return Value 0 Normal Others Error e When PCWAY and PCWAY LOGGER use the same communication setting Example 1 Read FL1000 5999 by using COM port Dim IngReturn As Long IngReturn Application Run PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEX 1 0 FL 1000 1 5000 lt Design the same COM port using by PCWAY gt Example 2 Read FL1000 FL5999 by using Ethernet Local Dim IngReturn As Long IngReturn Application Run PCWAYLoggerfncUploadEthernet 1 FL 1000 1 5000 lt lf PCWAY does not use thi
128. act eccatcasccnceeeeea ste ecs ae 7 21 7 9 Upgraded items of Ver2 82 i cis sicisieseseenees ite ened 7 22 8 Appendix ces ereere eeaeee eenia a al eee cated aaas 8 1 8 1 ApplicatiONS cck cvecsazssteesiccebecedin Tae ahscabieabeiceis AEA E AE TAA UE ENETEIA K N EEES 8 2 8 2 POWAY Ma ager sintesenn aeania ear Ean EE EE AEON capacdeaeaeaaaencesaenesdaedeoesestnes 8 3 873 PEWAY UTY nan aa E A a Bs KLEER ILES E BEE ER DUER hue BUER muen 8 4 8 4 Concerning the copying of the system created with POWAY 06 8 6 8 5 Backup Utility sssnassnonanana na a A A N A 8 7 8 6 PGWAY Logger sesnona onia a a a a aa a 8 9 8 7 Compatibility Between Each OS and Microsoft Excel cee 8 18 8 8 Compatibility Between POWAY and Each OS cccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 19 8 9 Correspondence Table between PCWAY and Microsoft Excel 8 20 8 10 Correspondence Table between PCWAY and Programmable Controllers 8 21 vii viii Chapter 1 Installation of PCWAY 1 1 System Configuration The matters which are listed here are what you have to prepare for besides of what is available with the PCWAY package Before doing the installing please be aware of what hardware and software you are using Hardware e Personal computer Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT Ver4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 MEWNET H only Windows 98 can use e Display Use what is
129. ailable No guarantee of proper operation Not included in the support PCWAY Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft products Excel 2010 Excel 2007 Excel 2003 Excel 2002 Excel 2000 Excel 97 Vere g A 3 A A A A A series Ver2 7 _ A 4 A A A A 2 series were l A A A A 2 series vere A A A A 2 series wora A A A 2 series poles A A A 2 series Kere A A A 2 series 1 Microsoft Excel2007 is supported from Ver2 7400 2 Microsoft Excel95 is supported until Ver2 7300 3 Microsoft Excel2010 is supported from Ver2 82 8 10 Correspondence Table between PCWAY and Programmable Controllers A Available No guarantee of proper operation Not included in the support uci FPO FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP5 FP10 FP10SH Ver2 8 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 7 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 6 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 5 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 4 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 3 series A A A A A A A A Ver2 1 series A A A A A A A A acs FPM FP SIGMA FP e FP X FPOR Ver2 8 series A A A A A Ver2 7 series A A A A A Ver2 6 series A A 1 A Ver2 5 series A A A Ver2 4 series A A 1 A Ver2 3 series A A 1 A Ver2 1 series A s A 1 As for FP SIGMA only 12k type is supported Record of changes
130. al Initialize 00nsec r Data length 7 bits 8 bits Help Stop bit E Receive O 1 bit 2 bits m Parity f Non C Odd Even gt Number of regions sy Over 65 Regions m Dial mode C Puse Tone Others faroT Time out fio sec Public Line Time out eo x sec Modem Command AT Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 4 r Pulse Width Settings Relay ON Time Work Folder fc Program S 3 9 To set the parameters for the various regions connected to the network click on and boot the Modem Support function Go to the other settings dialog box entering from the Details command button at the Modem Support dialog box and set C NET No and Connection No For further details refer to 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line and 6 14 Modem Support IE Modem Support x o 1 vo El 2 V1 Ri o 3 V2 V2 No R2 vO E 4 vo vo No RO vo E 5 vo vO No RO vO El 6 vO vo No RO vo m0 3 F 7 VO RO Modem Support an ae z Vv 1 2 semen 4 k z o d o M None o OOOO d je gl o cd ol e Region 1 Modem Support No 1 register the informations such as the telephone numbers C NET Settings No 1 No 1 Node 1 WRO 1 word No 2 Node 2 WRO 1 word Connection No No 1 Place a check at no 1 and 2 Si C NET Settings No 1 region Node 1 WRO 1lword jode 2 WRO 1iword il fal H
131. al at which PLC data is to be displayed based on the cell information settings e Relay Link When this is MEWNET H this is the interval which reads the PLC link area When the network type is C NET or Modem this is the interval which reads the settings of C NET Also this interval checks the Event Startup e File Processing This is the interval which checks whether the trigger device which was registered at File Processing is on e Macro Startup This is the processing interval at which the system checks to see whether or not the trigger device registered when the auto macro booted is on ee renee eee eee eee ee 6 5 7 Event Hold Field e Hold Range Start No When the hold type has been set then the conditions of the events up until this setting will remain in the same condition When set as non hold then the events will be turned to off Specify the number which you will start from for the event hold range from 0 to 100 0 Hold Entire Range 1 to 99 the numbers only after the number which you have set will be specified as the hold type 100 Entire Range Not Held The specifications are the same as those for the hold processing of the PLC internal relays 8 Timeout Settings e Retry Select on when you wish to confirm the reconnection of the PLC which the line is terminated due to the turning off of the power e Interval If you have selected on at Retry then next set the time for the confirming of the reco
132. al until establishing the connection within the range from 1 to 100 sec default value 60 9 Destination IP address Enter the IP address for the line that you would like to connect 10 Destination port No Enter the port number within the range from 1025 to 32767 default value 1025 11 Source port No Enter the port number of a personal computer 12 Source St No Enter the station number of a personal computer Do not enter the station number however without our ET LAN unit Note Enter the different node number from the Reception Source St No in the Reception Details dialog box 13 Informing Relay After connecting the line enter the relay turned on Mainly use it to check connecting the line for PLCs And once the relay is turned off turn it on after waiting for the system pulse width time entered in Operation Preferences dialog box See section 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences for setting details 14 Informing Event After connecting the line enter the event turned on Use this Informing Event as the trigger when you would like to execute the file processing and the macro of Microsoft Excel after connecting the line 15 Reception Details Set a personal computer configuration required for connection of the line from PLC to the computer Reception Click lide tal button to specify each item e Reception Details Here settings is activated with checking the Receive check box at Reception or Error Recept
133. all of the currently displayed Microsoft Excel sheet data automatically cuts the line and turns off this trigger 5 Ongoing Trigger When this Trigger is turned ON it rings up the phone number of Tel No and connects the line maintains the ongoing state of the line connection precisely until this Trigger is turned OFF Limited Time When the line is connected by the ongoing trigger make sure to register the connecting time for the purpose of prevention in case that the line has been forgotten to be turned off The connection time should be registered by minutes When the time has expired according to the time which has been registered the line will be cut off automatically and the ongoing Trigger will be turned OFF Tel No Input the telephone number for the line which you would like to connect Informing Relay After the line has been connected register the relay to be turned on This is primarily used to check the line connection on the PLC side Also to recover any PLC errors in progress before turning on the line turn the relay off and wait the amount of Relay ON Time of Pulse Width Settings this is set in the Operation Preferences settings for detailed information 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences After waiting the set amount of time turn on the relay Informing event Register the event which you would like to turn on after the line has been connected At this point that the line has been connected i
134. alog box At the PLC the Read Register is necessary to store the values given below 1st word The Modem Support register number is stored as a decimal number if the register number is 5 store K5 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 KO J eNote The processes afterward differ depending on the Operation Preferences dialog box settings If the modem port is different from the serial port number where the error reception occurred the Read Resister described above is read and then the event specified for the second word of the Read Resister is turned on and only the file processing specified for the trigger device of that event number is carried out Following that the line of the serial port on the error reception side is cut off Please be aware however that if any other internal processing has been specified for the trigger informing event for which file processing is being carried out the line will have already been cut off before that processing is carried out Also be aware that processing other than the file processing which is specified using the event number of the second word for the Read Resister will be executed after the line has been cut off Additions 1 The contents o
135. als of 2 hours 0 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 8 00 22 00 PCWAY settings lt Interval Timer gt Interval 2 hours Device V100 lt E mail Setting gt Trigger Device V100 For the settings other than Trigger Device enter the settings for the data you wish to send For details concerning E mail Setting refer to 6 18 E mail Setting 4 9 4 Inquiry on the Equipment Status from the PC and the Cellular Phone The e mail including the command that V Event of PCWAY should be turned ON is sent from the PC and the cellular phone to PCWAY According to the V Event PCWAY responds the necessary information to them 1 E mail including the command that V100 should be turned ON 3 Send return E mail 2 E mail send processing is executed by Cellular phone the V100 and the necessary data is sent e E mail is sent from the PC and the cellular phone to PCWAY and the return mail is sent to them by turning the V100 Event ON 1 Sending the V100 to PCWAY The following characters are sent to PCWAY V100 1 indicated in one byte characters lt Format gt VXXX 0 L 0 0FF 1 0N Event number 0 to 99F Operating some Events Example Turning the V10 OFF the V21 ON and V30 ON V10 0 4 Return code 0x0D 0x0A V21 179 V30 1 2 Sending e mail by entering V100 in Trigger Device PCWAY settings lt E mail Setting gt Trigger Device V100 For the settings other than Trigger Device enter the set
136. ange where you would like to paste the copied contents When you have selected the cell or cells which you would like to paste click the Paste Cell Settings 6 X Microsoft Excel Book1 Eile Edit ww Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat altae ame tel 2a am ed amp ae AO DE ar oe At this point the device number and event number of the pasted cells will increment one by one X Microsoft Excel Booki gaa File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat etme ame Gel aai h Gd O p aS Er Oe Om on OF of BS Before performing the pasting by clicking Set Cell Order a i the setting of the desired pasting direction will be fixed For further details please refer to 5 5 Set Cell Order 4 11 4 1 4 How to operate during the running of the monitoring e Changing the Register e Changing the Relay status e The Continuous Change Mode e Data downloading Changing the register value Double click the cell where you would like to change the previously registered value The Register Contents Correction dialog box will be displayed With this input the value at the New Value edit box When you click OK the value of the Tegister will be changed EA Microsoft Excel Booki mes j File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Ee Oe rege i S di a amp 2 ei ma N gt i zjx TEA MS ax 200 1
137. arget file type or input the wild card at the See C drop down list box 4 The file which is contained in the specified drive and folder will appear at the middle See D 5 Select the file wish you wish to back up e When you wish to back up only a certain file See button Select up to one file at the D area and click the With this the selected file will be transferred to Backup Files Because files can only be selected individually if there are several files to be backed up repeatedly select a file and press penne 7 After you have transferred the folder if there is a file which you wish to not back up select the file at Backup Files and click 5 button This will be added as a selection at the very end of the D area drop down list box 6 e When you wish to back up all existing files which are displayed Click the 2 4 button With this the files which were displayed at the See D area is transferred to the Backup Files After the files are transferred when you wish not to back up the files all of the files at Backup Files then click the Derete ALB button With this all of the files are transferred to the See D area After finishing your selecting of your files for back up then click the xw button After the compressing is finished if one floppy disk is enough the PCBackup EXE file is created at the currently selected folder If you will need more than 2 floppy di
138. at No s of different Application Startup windows applications associated to No is started in turn starting from the smaller number which is registered 6 Ethernet Remote When the same trigger has been set for the different No s of Ethernet Remote the file processing corresponding to each of the registered number at No will be executed in turn 7 E mail Settings When the same trigger has been set for the different No s of E mail Settings the file processing corresponding to each of the registered number at No will be executed in turn Gg eNote e Same Trigger Setting When the same trigger has been set for each of the registering topics you must note that in such a case only one item for processing which has been registered will be performed for instance when the same trigger has been set for File Processing and Auto Macro Startup registering Concerning on which registered item for processing will be valid this varies each time Please avoid setting the same trigger e Concerning the numbers at No which you register The registered item will be executed in the number order where the item associated with the smaller number is executed first 2 5 4 Clipboard With PCWAY it is possible to use the clipboard when displaying the file data on to the Microsoft Excel sheet Note that when this clipboard is used at a different application during the running of the monitor then the dis
139. ations 1 Execute Select whether to execute the selected No or not 2 Trigger device This specifies the device that boots the system M Relay link 0 to 255F V Event 0 to 99F 3 Informing relay If there is a PLC relay to be turned on after an application has been executed specify the relay using this item If the relay link has been selected with the Trigger device however always make sure a setting is entered for this parameter 4 Informing event If there is an event to be turned on after an application has been executed specify the event using this item 5 Application File Name This is used to register the name of the application to be executed Either select the file with the Reference button or input it directly 6 Argument If there are any values that are necessary for processing after an application has been executed they can be entered using this item 7 Comment Input comment up to 40 characters Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save in CSV Format C This saves data in the CSV format Note With this method of saving data the data is only saved in the CSV format but no setting contents are registered Use Save or Save and Exit to register items Print P This prints out data Print Preview V This displays an image of the data to be printed before printing it Printer Setup R Settings such as the model of printer bein
140. ay the file data which you have created All of the file data will be displayed at the selected cell as the first field of the first record X Microsoft Excel Book1 aul File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat v 2 eee cease er mecha ae 1 2 3 4 5 8 r If there are 100 record files in 3 fields a range of cells is displayed starting with the selected cell and extending three cells to the right and 100 cells in the downward direction Even if only one record of data has been stored all 100 cells in the downward direction are displayed 99 of those cells will be empty As long as any data at all exists within that range the rest of the range will be displayed with the cells empty Set the file data displaying at the Cell Settings icon E For further information on the settings refer to 5 1 Cell Settings Cell Settings 2 x Target Attribute K Relay Read Only C Register Read Write Connection Write Only Connection Settings File No 1 is File No Reference Generation Generation 1 Display Method Display All Records At Once Update Method Update File Contents Each Time x V Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 2 When the settings has been completed click OK 4 22 reer ere rere ee creer 3 After running Run PCWAY run the Start Monitor When the file processing has been completed the
141. bed in IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers format Therefore valid number of digits for real number data are 6 to 7 and the data cannot be correctly displayed in the designated number of decimal places The value in the last number of decimal places is rounded off When the designated number of decimal places is not displayed correctly in Microsoft Excel specify the number of digits to display by selecting Format Cells gt Number gt Category High speed data communication e Reading and writing the data at higher speed by specifying Cell Settings and file process data in sequence e The number of cells to be downloaded is increased from 1024 to 8191 In addition other multiple cells than the selected contiguous cells can be downloaded Comparison in reference speed Number of data Cell Settings Register 1 word X 8191 cells DTO to DT8190 C NET connection 19200bps Approx 3 min Previous version Approx 1 5 min Ver 2 5 Ethernet connection Approx 3 min Previous version Approx 45 sec Ver 2 5 Number of data File processing 2 words X 256 DTO to DT510 C NET connection 19200bps Approx 8 sec Previous version Approx 1 sec Ver 2 5 The time to display file data on cells is not included for the time above PC specifications used for comparison OS Windows XP Professional Version 2002 CPU Mobile Intel Pentium Ill Clock 1200 MHz Mem
142. cceieeeseads otseies oes 7 4 7 4 API Function for Event V ACCOSS 20 02 6 24 ones lt lt ckesd ce sescet a casteaesesaes aeneeaaet 7 9 7 4 1 Obtaining the Status of the Specified Event Number VC Function 7 9 7 4 2 Obtaining the Status of the Specified Event Number VB Function 7 10 7 4 3 Changing the Status of the Specified Event Number VC Function 7 11 7 4 4 Changing the Status of the Specified Event Number VB Function 7 12 7 4 5 Obtaining the Status of All Events VC Function cceeeeeeeees 7 13 7 5 Functions Upgraded in POWAY Ver 2 5 cccecceeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 14 5A POWAY macro AUTO record eirinen tanie eean eieae 7 14 7 5 2 Available for WR WX WY and WL devices cccccccerrerererrerrrrrren 7 14 7 5 3 Available for Decimal point Real number data eee 7 15 7 5 4 High speed data communication sssssesesreeriesrierriririrtrrinrrrerrresrens 7 15 7 5 5 AND and OR with calculation functions 7 16 7 5 6 Saving Microsoft Excel books as HTML 7 17 7 5 7 Enable Disable selection for the connecting station No during POWAY MONIT TIN Ou aiian ea a aa Ea aaa 7 18 7 6 Upgrade items of Ver2 74 o sssssssnsssserssrnsrrrrreerssrrorrrrsesnrnnnrnrrrseernnnrnrree 7 19 7 7 Upgrade items of Ver2 76 a sssssssosssesnsrnorronroerrnnrsnrorseerrsnnnnrrnseennnnnenrree 7 20 7 8 Upgraded items of Vel e 80s cactc cic te ceractdeccra nce ec
143. ception side Please be aware however that if any other internal processing has been specified for the trigger device event for which file processing is being carried out the line will have already been cut off before that processing is carried out Furthermore if the event number of the 2nd word of the read register is used for purposes other that file processing they will be executed after the connection is severed Addition 1 The contents of the 1st word for read register are ignored 2 This process is only recognized if an error is received If you want to check the contents of the error it will be necessary to execute the file processing with the event set by the 2nd word of the read register and gather the data at the PLC Followings are the explanation when the same serial port is set for the modem and error reception 4 The event stored in the 2nd word of the read register is turned on If H FFFF is stored in the 2nd word of the read register then it will not be processed 5 Read the PLC status After connection is established PCWAY will read the statuses of the PLC node numbers set at Connection No P in order If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read a retry will be attempted at least once J s NoTe Regarding the amount of retries If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read retries will be attempted until the time set for Public Line Timeout elapses If the status cannot be read by then that P
144. ck within No of Words and select the number of words which you will use Display method Word numbers NUM Numerical value 1 word or 2 words HEX Hexadecimal Display BIN Binary Display MEW MEW Notation CHR Character Code MSG Message Display 1 word RAL Real number 2 words 1 word 16 words 6 Operation Formula No or Message No When Display Method is set to NUM Numerical Value RAL Real Number Operation Formula No Set the number for the operation formula When you are not sure of the number by left clicking the ___ Operation Fermi button the registering window will be displayed With this select the desired number and finish When Display Method is set to MSG Message Display Message No Set the varying numbers for the message When you are not sure of the number to set by Message left clicking the button the registering window will be displayed With this select the desired number and finish When Attribute is set to Read Write or Write Only 7 Input Range When you would like to check the Min and Max range for the value which you will change then it is necessary for you to set the minimum value and the maximum value at MIN and MAX When you have done this only the MIN lt X lt MAX value is imputable 5 1 1 3 File data Target Attribute 2 Relay Read Only Register C Ev Connection t C Write Onl C Connection Settings
145. click the of Update All Sheet Data or go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Update All Sheet Data 2 Before saving the book when you would like to erase all of the settings formerly set at Cell Settings and save only the data use Save Excel File Either click the gy of Save Excel File or go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Save Excel File With PCWAY the file name which has been saved using Save Excel File will be the file name before being saved YYYYMMDDHHMMSS year month day hour minute second By using Update All Sheet Data and Save Excel File together with the macro it is possible to save the file automatically 4 7 3 Saving Microsoft Excel books as HTML e Active books can be saved as HTML by selecting one from the following three options 1 HTML File Save icon on the PCWAY tool bar 2 POWAY menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl M Microsoft Excel books can also be saved as HTML by calling from the user created macro in Auto Macro Startup Built in macros File name automatically saving process Sub PCWAYsubHTMLFileSave File name designation saving process Function PCWAYfncHTMLFileSaveNameType__ Argument 1 As String Argument 2 As Integer As String Argument 1 File name to be saved An extension is not included Argument 2 0 Original book is saved 1 Original book is not saved When Argument 1 is set but Argument 2 is not set the case 0 above is applied R
146. color Background color i Se on background color n character color ee M EXAMPLE e Setting of Event When displaying and operating the status of event VO status do the settings as demonstrated below by the figure Target attribute Relay C Read Only C Register File Data ReadjWrite Event Connection es C Connection Settings Write Only Event No fo Character Change No Co Character cial IV Next Time Open On Double click Cancel Delete ee fa Chara cter Change File E Aelp H io ON ill Specify the text and the color to be displayed when VO is on and when it is off under No 1 C Character input Edit display color Selectcolor Background color YesC No Select character color BEEE r an background color vt tee The Select No can be changed by clicking on the number at the left end in the Character Change 2 x in the Character Change Ni E lear selection The registered contents at Character Change can also be used at the other Cell Settings 4 1 3 Copying and pasting the cell information 1 Select a cell which you would like to copy Click Copy Cell Settings ea X Microsoft Excel Booki Hl File Edit View Joe ft Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat tl 2 a Gel amp f aR Er De mm ar wR 2 Click the cell r
147. communication performance becomes high but the memory consumption rises eae madue starts IgriRAANLALIRADINIITATAINNANAATALATAATALOA Help Many memory iow communication ihe meman High communication lt This function can use from POWAY Ver2 4 over gt Communication Module is started every PLC unit If you check to the checkbox PCWAY executes the Ethernet communication module every PLC unit But the Ethernet Communication in File Processing and Auto Macro Startup C NET Settings is out of it If you don t check to the checkbox PCWAY does the same action with below Ver 2 4 If the communication error occurs with one unit all communication does influence And the sheet data doesn t renew until fixing the error L module starts You can set 16 64 modules If PCWAY communicates with 17 unit or more in setting 16 modules PCWAY executes the communication with 2 unit or more into 1 module 6 2 Character Change e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Character Change C e Click till This is the registering which will change the character and the color bound to be displayed by turning on off the bit device aa Character Change File E Help H When OFF C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CT ieee D background color HEHEHHE mo o when ov pay Hema ap a a T Spe a
148. connected to PCWAY Use Remote connection when user structured system is mainly as follows Example 1 AE COONS Max 254 PLCs jaa Line B Line C But 63 PLCs are available if ET LAN unit of PLC is used _ _ ne eee _ eee ee Only one remote PLC can access PCWAY on each line Form of connection The Remote connection has three types e Send Line Connecting to PLCs from PCWAY There are two types of Regular Connection method a method of connection which must be manually cut and One Scan Connection method a method of connection which be automatically cut off after scanning over PLCs The automatically link connection can be also applied to all destinations entered with the One Scan Connection method e Reception Connecting to PCWAY from PLC PCWAY can be connecting until specifying wait time e Error Reception Connecting to PCWAY from PLC As soon as receiving an error POWAY automatically cuts off line after only required processing 3 9 USB GT32 GT05 Connection wOne GT32 GT05 unit can be connected to a computer with a USB cable GT32 USB Cable RS232C Operating environment settings Start Operation Preferences to specify the following information c icati Click the egies button of Net Type Select USB in the Network Type Also specify the Time out setting For the connected PLC click Connection No B to start Connection No and check the un
149. d Sub PCWAYLoggersubCnvDwordToWord Argument1 As Long Argument 2 As Long Argument 3 As Integer Argument 1 f 2Word Access Number Argument 2 2Word Data Return value Variant type array data converted to 1Word 1 Word data area needs the multiple area of 2 word area number Ya EXAMPLE Dim IngDword 0 To 99 As Long Dim intData 0 To 199 As Integer Call Application Run PCWAYLoggersubCnvDwordToWord 100 IngDword intData 8 14 e Gets the Error Message Function PCWAYLoggerfncGetMessage As String Return value Message e Sets the Language Sub PCWAYLoggersubSetLanguage Argumenti As Integer Argument 1 0 Japanese 1 English e Copy the data value from PCWAY LOGGER internal memory to Clipboard This function is not able to design the value type Display type is only Decimal 1 word Sub PCWAYLoggersubClipCopy Argument 1 As Long Argument 1 Number of Columns in a line e Copy the data value from PCWAY LOGGER internal memory to Clipboard This function is able to design the value type Sub PCWAYLoggersubClipCopyEX Argument 1 As Long Argument 2 As Integer Argument 3 As Integer Argument 1 Number of Columns in a line Argument 2 i Display method Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal If there is alphabet Alignment is left Hexadecimal String type Adding before value MEW Notation Argument 3 Number of bytes 1 1byte 2 1word 3 2words e Data acquisition process in PCWA
150. d uum Numeric Value No of Words 1 X Operation Formula No Jone Operation Formula Input Range MIN MAX IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete Specified range of the cells Fd Microsoft Excel Book1 File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Etmem ELO CEE 100 v 2 Click the FE or go from the PCWAY in the menu bar to Download Data For more details refer to 5 11 Download Data 4 2 Saving PLC Information into the File 4 2 1 The file With PCWAY it is possible to save PLC information into the hard disk The gathered data which has been saved into the hard disk is called a file J s NoTe The file we are referring to now is not the Microsoft Excel book file one A file is made up of 2 types of information sources field and record The constitution of the file field No 1 field No 2 field No 3 field No 4 Example Date Time Production No Defect No Record1 Record2 Record3 Field A field indicates a data item Items such as the date time and number of production are called fields Settings can be entered for up to 256 fields items There are 5 field types which can be set with PCWAY Date Time Integer Real Num and Char Select the type which matches best with the item Date month day year 4digits MM DD YYYY Time hour minute second HH MM SS Integer LONG
151. d Parity parameters and enter a setting for the Timeout parameter _commaction Wo B and place a check mark at the check boxes for the node numbers which you will use For further details refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences and 6 16 Connection No m When you would like to connect the CPU of the PLC with RS232C and then access to other PLCs positioned at the same level set as the following Link Unit No 1 Node No 1 Link Unit No 2 Node No 1 Link Unit No 3 Node No 1 At a network such as the one above when wishing to access PLC No 1 3 of the figure above run Operation Preferences and open the Operation Preferences dialog box by selecting Option at the Settings of menu bar pull down menu EE Operation Preferences q x IV ON OFF confirmation message box JV PCWAY menubar visible JV PCWAY toolbar visible J Sheet data no refresh mode necessary to compile Use Link unit No when connection by RSZ32C Communication with the setting unit no of the Ethernet connection Monitoring Command of MEWTOCOL is not used ewes ses Place a check mark at Use Link unit No when connected by RS232C After these settings have been entered all subsequent access to the PLC is handled via link code numbers rather than CPU code numbers anorte e If you did not place a check mark before at the prior dialog box the No 2 PLC of the figure above will be perceived a
152. d V19E on EVENT MB_Ok else MessageBox NULL The event number specified at the argument is invalid EVENT MB_Ok e Applicable information Microsoft Visual C Version 6 0 or later Header Declared within pcwayapi h Import library Uses w_merdpc lib DLL Uses w_mcrdpc dll Since it is using the same DLL as PCWAY make sure to use the program that uses this function from the same directory that PCWAY is executed from Le 7 4 4 Changing the Status of the Specified Event Number VB Function PCWAYapiEventWrite e Function Change the status of the specified event number e Construction PCWAYapiEventWrite strEventNo intModeState e Configuration The PCWAYapiEventWrite function construction is made up of the arguments given below StrEventNo Specifies the character string of the event number Insert NULL Chr 0 at the end of the specified event number IntModeState Specify 1 when you want to turn the specified event on and specify 0 when you want to turn it off If any value other than 0 or 1 is set processes are carried out as if 1was specified e Return value When the event is changed as desired 0 is returned If an event number that does not exist is specified for the argument 1 is returned e Explanation Reverses the status of event 19E V19E Declare Function MyAppGetEventState Lib W_MCRDPC dll Alias PC WAYapiEventRead ByVal strEventNo As String As Integer Declare Function
153. d event numbers fx Application Startup x No ia Execute M Yes Trigger device ft gt 0 M Informing relay m Node p x Relay R 0 Informing event V Notify y 0 Application File Name Reference R Arqument Reference P Comment PageUp U PageDown D Help H 3 If there are any relays and events that you want to turn on after an application has booted specify the relevant informing relays and informing events If a relay link has been selected with a Trigger device however always enter a setting for the informing relay 4 Enter the name of the application to be booted under Application File Name The name can either be input directly or can be selected using the Reference button 5 Enter any necessary arguments 6 Enter a comment that will make it easy to identify the specified processing 7 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 16 Connection No e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Operation Preferences e Click a It is possible to enter the Connection No dialog box from the Operation Preferences dialog box F Operation Preferences C Program Fi Connection No i ee
154. de number 1 click the Over 65 Regions O button in the Operation Preferences dialog box click the n button and then place a check at node number 1 in the dialog box that appears However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Informing Relay PLC node number becomes 0 When this relay turns on the PLC can verify the condition of the phone line connection 4 Phone line disconnection When the Event turns off the phone line is disconnected Also if the Waiting time elapses before the Event turns on the phone line is automatically disconnected Concerning the phone line connecting PLC It is important to be aware of the information given below regarding the error informing PLC 1 Before calling it is necessary to have the RS232C port usage set to Use Serial Data Communication general purpose port Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 2 After calling make sure to immediately change RS232C port usage to the Perform computer link setting after receiving CONNECT Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 4 9 Using the E mail Function The status information of the equ
155. ded under the field s of __ lt lt Select To gt __ lt lt Select ce gt gt and or lt lt Select Ce gt gt To delete the address in Address Select select the address you wish to delete and click Delete button E mail Setting Address Book Selected Destination Address List Name Adress S Test Test aaa bbb ip Sample samplel ecece dd Samp le2 sample2 111 222 333 Address Select lt lt Select To gt gt __ Setect cer o gt lt lt Dee Select coz gt gt Ce lt lt __ lt lt Select Bec gt gt Bee Test lt Test aaa bbb jp gt T Deletes by Delete Key Close Help 7 Send Message Enter the message you wish to send within 256 characters in one byte characters 8 Sends the data in the Cell Place a check mark in the check box here Then enter the Sheet Name and Cell Area of the Microsoft Excel Sheet you wish to send When Send Message is entered the data in the Cell Area is sent following the message specified in Send Message Example Sheet Name Sheet 1 Cell Area C2 F4 IV Sends the data in the Cell Sheet Name fsneeti Cell Area CZ fra Example A1 C3 Ca TE Te To Tee i 4 723 A B C ganl Success 10 30 51 Ea Error 1 2 3 5 G 3 Message to be send A B C 10 30 51 1 2 3 9 Attaches the book of the Microsoft Excel in PCWAY now Place a check mark in this check box when you wish to send the
156. dem Support register number is stored as a decimal number if the register number is 5 store K5 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 KO Since the data value of the 2nd word becomes the event number that event is set to ON To inform the PLC of the connection click on Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box and set the Informing Relay I Modem Support When connection by the phone line is made it turns from off to on Also if there is link relay that is on from the link relay area set at C NET Settings or trigger event they will be executed Afterwards the informing relay is set to off to inform the PLC that connection is severed and the connection is automatically severed When there are 65 or more PLCs connected Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the Over 65 Regions a button to display the MODEM Over 65 Regions dialog box EE Operation Preferences x MODEM Over 65 Regions Informing Relay VD Informing Event V Inform v 0 0 Read Register Node l DT Connection No iP emne ewan At this dialog box set the Read Register and wi
157. e allowing you to do the inputting At this point the character and the background color will not yet be displayed Input in the same manner at When OFF column by the same procedures aaa Character Change File F Help H When OFF z mo When A E si T ed reff Ten le lt a reff EJ i MARN Character input C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CT eee l r Select background color ee 2 To add acolor to the character and background after the character has been input either select Edit display color and then select the character color and background color or directly select the character color or background color which automatically switches to Edit display color Click with the left button of the mouse for the when ON or when OFF column where character has been input to change the selected display color aa Character Change File E Help H unen w OO J nor C Character input Select color Background color Yes No Select character color SEeGeCre u background color Se alfelf olf lf Ulf I IL 1 UI IMI 3 When all of the inputting has been completed go to the menu bar gt File gt Save gt Exit or to Select current No and finish With this the necessary registering is completed However Select current No and finish can
158. e are two methods for phone line connections single trigger and ongoing trigger Single trigger After phone line connection each PLC is scanned Then after the internal processing file processing etc is performed by relay link areas that are on at the time of the scan the data in the active Microsoft Excel sheet is updated Then the phone line connection is automatically severed The events to start this process is set at the Sin Trig column of the Modem Support dialog box After disconnection these events are automatically turned off Ongoing trigger Connection is maintained until it is severed Set the events to start this process at the Ong Trig column of the Modem Support dialog box Connection is maintained until these events go off You can also set the Limited Time min for the connection When this limited time elapses the connection is severed and the event set as Ong Trig are set to off e Rotating connection If you wish to automatically rotate among the specified regions and make connections then click the Modem Support button All Settings button and set Set All Trigger in the dialog box that appears When the event set at Set All Trigger turns on the Sin Trig set for each region are all turned on The Ong Trig are not turned on Then a single connection is performed rotating through each region The connection interval for each region is set by clicking the All Settings button and
159. e error e mail is stored in the Retry folder which is in the Send file folder until it is resent Connection settings 10 Use Dial up connections Place a check mark in this check box when using dial up connection 11 Connection name Select the desired connection name from the pulldown menu which includes dial up connection names registered in the PC When a check mark is not placed in Use Dial up connections check box the dial up connection name cannot be selected Private 12 Mail address Enter the e mail address of the PC in which PCWAY is used The address specified here is displayed in the From section on the received e mail 13 Name Enter the name of the person who sends the e mail The name specified here is displayed in the From section on the received e mail Folder settings 14 Send file folder E mails which have not been sent yet are stored in this folder The folder of the e mail with the sending error is transferred to the Retry folder in this folder 15 Sent file folder Files for sent and received error log e mails are stored in this folder Sent e mail file is stored in the Send folder in this folder Received e mail file is stored in the Retry folder in this folder File name for the send e mail SendYYMMDDHHMMSSNo msd gt 001 to 999 00 to 59 00 to 59 00 to 23 01 to 31 01 to 12 2002 and later File name for the received e mail RecvYYMMDDHHMMSSNo mrv Same file name as the one for the send e
160. e sound file does not exist Register for a new sound file 5 Input a simple name for the execution contents which you have set at Comments 6 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 14 Modem Support e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Modem Support M e Click This is the registering for watching PLC s located in distant regions using the public phone line It is possible to register up to 64 different regions telephone number For further information on the operatings refer to 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line IE Modem Support Ea File E Help H me C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments 1 1 2 2 2 R1 vo 3 3 3 v2 v2 No R2 vo 4 4 4 vo vo No RO vo 5 5 5 vo vo No RO vo 6 6 6 vo vo No RO vo To VO vo No RO vo 8 8 8 vo vo No RO yo 9 9 9 vo vo No RO vo EI 10 10 10 VO vo No RO vo O 1111 11 VO vo No RO vo 12 12 12 VO vo No RO vo 13 13 13 VO vo No RO vo 14 14 14 VO vo No RO vo O 15 15 15 vO vo No RO vo 1616 16 VO vo No RO vo 17 17 17 VO vo No RO vo O 18 18 18 vO vo No RO vo gt
161. e the number and enter the settings e Registering procedures of All Settings 1 The Set All Trigger sets the trigger that turns on all of the Single Trigger registered under Details 2 If numerous single triggers are on the Interrupt Trigger sets any triggers not currently being processed to the standby state If numerous single triggers are on the Terminate Trigger turns off all triggers not currently being processed 3 At Read Register set the data register which PCWAY will read when the line has been connected from the PLC side Only the Unit No 1 node number will be read Concerning the contents of the data register refer to the Read Register at the Item explanation 4 Next specify the number of times that a connection is to be redialed if the telephone is dialed and a connection error occurs on the line The time that the system waits before retrying the connection is specified under Resend Wait Time 5 Specify the amount of time to be waited before the next connection when numerous single triggers are on a line is disconnected from one node and then connected to the next node 6 When all of the items have been finished being registered click on the Exit button This dialog box will be closed 6 15 Application Startup e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Application Startup U e Click fiz Application Startup ee re Noo BOND Item Explan
162. e to perform the procedures in high speed performance omitting the upper no 1 performance then it is necessary to open the Operation Preferences dialog box and go to the operation Preferences menu bar gt Settings C gt Option O At this dialog box place a check mark at the Sheet information not updated mode necessary to compile check box You must be aware that when this mode is specified the upper no 1 performance will be omitted and therefore it is compulsory to perform compile When you execute compile all of the sheet information of an active book will be written in into the work file After this POWAY will communicate with the PLC based on the work file Gag eNote When you would like to add delete or change the cell information when Sheet information not updated mode is specified you must execute compile The changed contents will not be reflected with Read Setting Again 5 17 Protecting the Sheet If a sheet has been protected by using Protect Sheet P under Protection P on the Tool T in Microsoft Excel menu the input password should be noted on the Protect line in the Microsoft Excel section of the Pcway ini file found in the folder when PCWAY is installed For example if the sheet was protected using a password called MEW open the Pcway ini file using the Memopad and enter the following Input Excel DBLCLICK 1 ToggleSwitch 0 Menubar 1 Toolbar 1 SheetChange 0
163. e turning ON of XO LO will self hold itself e Operation of PCWAY With the turning on of LO the file processing will be executed The RO will be turned to on after the file processing has been completed When LO has turned to off confirm this and turn off RO The file processing using the event as the trigger When using the event as the trigger PCWAY will turn this event to OFF after the file processing has been completed 4 2 2 Create a file and execute the processing Here we will give an example of processing M EXAMPLE e Settings of the file Store the processes of the number of production number of defects and defect rate into the file at every 1 hour interval At every 1 hour the number in production and number of defects will be re sated at 0 Up to 100 of the most updated files of 100 hrs will be saved What to prepare with the PLC 1 Data that needs to be saved must be stored in a PLC register A program is necessary such as storing the number of production in DTO of the station no 1 PLC and the number of defects in DT1 of station no 1 To find out the defects rate a function is used which allows operations to be carried out on values of registers using the PCWAY and the results to be stored in a file 2 A program must be set up so that the time that the equipment has been operating is added up with the PLC and when the one hour point is reached a relay here LO is used goes on that trigge
164. ead Number 1 1024 Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Other You should get the area data of 256 array in Argument 3 and 4 5 This function only store the data value in internal memory of PCWAYLOGGER When you would like to display the data value you have to paste function after copy to clipboard e Download data to extension area in PLC Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadMemoryEthernet Argument1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Argument3 As Byte Argument4 As Integer Argument5 As Integer Argument6 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the downloading Function PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadMemoryEthernet2 Argumenti As Integer Argument2 As Integer Argument3 As Byte Argument4 As Integer Argument5 As Integer Argument6 As Integer As Long Argumenti PLC Station No Argument2 SLOT No Argument3 Write Flag O Not Write 1 Write Argument4 Start Address No 0 1023 Argument5 Write Number 1 1024 Argument6 Write Data Return Value 0 Normal 1 Fatal Error 2 PCWAY is not started 3 Device No is out of range Else Other You should get the area data of 256 array in Argument 3 and 4 5 In case of Ethernet uses Ethernet Local of PCWAY Register the destinations to Ethernet Local of Communication Settings e Convert 2Word gt 1Wor
165. ecify whether to execute from the overview window or not Click the box on the left of the No This will be executed only when there has been placed a check mark here In order to do each of the settings first choose the row where you would like to do the settings By left clicking the Details command button the details window of Event Startup will be displayed With this do the necessary settings tii Event Startup x File fEF Help H Condition Event H e Details window 1 When performing the execution of the registered contents place a check mark at Execute ij Event Startup x Trigger u o C NET No 1 Browse U Start Condition OFF gt ON C ON gt OFF Informing Event y oO Initialize by sheet name Sheet Name __ Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H 2 Set at Trigger the device which will start the execution 3 C NET No will be displayed only when Modem has been specified at Operation Preferences Choose the number which has been set at C NET Settings for C NET No After clicking the Browse command button the C NET Settings window will be displayed With this by going to File of C NET Settings Select current No and finish this C NET No will be chosen and will return to the Event Startup window Concerning the registering details 6 11 C NET Settings Event Startup x No I 1 Execute MV ives holguer i o C NET No
166. ecute V Yes Trigger n gt 0 M Sound Name Play P Browse B Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H Select the number which has been set at C NET Settings for C NET No This is selectable only when the Network Type is specified as Modem at Operation Preferences When this is not Modem then the setting items will not be displayed After clicking the Browse command button the C NET Settings window will be displayed If you go to File of C NET Settings gt Select current No and finish the C NET number will be selected and will return to the Sound Startup window For further information on the registerings 6 17 C NET Settings K Sound Startup E No 1 Execute V es Trigger Iu o C NET No 1 Browse W Sound Name Play P Browse B Comments j PageUp U PageDown D Help H 4 Set the file which you would like to have sound generated from when the trigger turns ON at Sound Name Either input directly the file name or select from the window of which you can enter with the Browse B button With the Play P command button it is possible to test the sound of the sound file E Sound Startup x No roa Execute iV es Trigger Hoy oo Sound Name PlayiP Browse B Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H J s ote When the sound name is displayed at the details window but not at the overview window this means that th
167. ee JL al fa LU AARET BID im E sles oa E BIS im 5 al ty tt ec ec ece rece ce TT Connection No l No l region No l region x x x x m m x x x x BEEBE ER eee E Uuuu uuu u lt E E Euu Uu U H lt BEEBE eeeeee E U G U eee ee mm M m E u u uu uuu ui emmm CE E G U u U uu gi e Region 2 Modem Support No 2 register the informations such as the telephone numbers __Pagevp yy _Pagepown p C NET Settings 5 C NET Settings No 2 No 1 Node 1 WRO 1 word No 2 Node 2 WRO 1 word z ier E EDE E W NOAR r fe WRO 1 word a Pad e EE l m 2 Ee par eee O im C Cara a _ in z Cara oa ee S Connection No 7 Connector No No 2 Place a check at No 1 2 and 3 at check box 2 No Z region No 2 region x a x x T E Li E a E E Uuuu g u u g lt E E U G u G u G U lt E E u u u u u U E lt mm m a a E G u u u u u upi E G u u uuu uui C G u u u u u u ui m m m m m m m a a a E G u u uuu upi e Region 3 Modem Support No 3 register the informations such as the telephone numbers C NET Settings No 3 No 1 Node 1 3 No 3 region No 3 region WRO 2 word Sj C NET Settings e era e o erom e oo he iii Connection No Connection No No 3 Place a check at No 1 at check box 3 No 3 region No 3 region E E u u uuu g EH OE G u u Uuuu gi CE E u u u uuu gi E E u u uug ggi CE E u u
168. er e C NET Settings e Auto Macro Startup e Sound Startup e Application Startup e Modem Support e Application Startup e Ethernet Remote e E mail Setting e Help display e Compile Sub PCWAYsubShellDisplayChange Sub PCWAYsubShellMessage Sub PCWAYsubShellCalc Sub PCWAYsubShellFileMaster Sub PCWAYsubShellFileLog Sub PCWAYsubShellFileTrigger Sub PCWAYsubShellEventTrigger Sub PCWAYsubShellWeeklyTimer Sub PCWAYsubShelllntervalTimer Sub PCWAYsubShellCNetEntry Sub PCWAYsubShellEventMacro Sub PCWAYsubShellSound Sub PCWAYsubShellRunExec Sub PCWAYsubShellModem Sub PCWAYsubShellRunExec Sub PCWAYsubShellEthernet Sub PCWAYsubShellEMail Sub PCWAYsubHelpDisp Sub PCWAYsubCompile p 7 5 Internal treatment function e Confirm the currently connected node number Sub PCWAYsubMyAppSetUnitState e Function for obtaining PCWAY execution folder Function PCWAYfncExecDirectory as String Return value Execution folder Example Dim strFolder as String strFolder Application Run PCWAYfncExecDirectory e Function for obtaining PCWAY work folder Function PCWAYfncWorkDirectory as String Return value Work folder Example Dim strFolder as String strFolder Application Run PCWAYfncWorkDirectory e Obtains sheet protection password Function PCWAYfncGetProtect as String Return value Password Example Dim strPassword as String strPassword Application Run PCWAYfncGetProtect Supplement example This is the example of the removing of the
169. eration Preferences in the PCWAY being the same as that specified for einna under Error Reception Reception is made possible by placing a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in Communication the Operation Preferences dialog box Click the aeaea button and perform the required settings at the Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error dialog box that appears EE Operation Preferences x File F Settings C Help H Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error E4 Network type Moc EM 7 PC Type M Refr COM port aa E pot SL PC Type rex PC AT gt Disp ea Baud rate 9600 Y bps a Network Rela __Initisiee r Data length aE eo File C 7bits amp bits Help Communication ee eee Settings S Macr Stop bit A 1bit f 2bits i Permit the M Receive connection M event ae Hold 7 j f Non C Odd fC Even m Error Reception r Dial mode Communication Settings A n 5 z Puse Tone C Others fATOP Number of regions Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 Time out 10 Ba fisc Time Public Line Time out feo 7 sec Pulse Width Settings Retr Relay ON Time 1 homer z Modem Command AT Command ATVIEOSO 152 43 Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY 7 Ls The Read Register setting is required at the PLC When there are less than 65 PLCs connected Click the Modem Sup
170. ers 1 Limitation item of PLC FP10S PLC can t use all nodes in Cell Settings 2 PCWAY can t communicate at the same time with other software using the same COM port But about Our FPWIN GR of Ver1 1 or more they can communicate at the same time 3 You can t together use LINE and TEL in using MODEM 4 All nodes of Node No in Cell Settings It can t use PLC Type FP5 FP10 FP3 Less than Ver4 5 FP10S Less than Ver1 5 5 When managing the chart sheet When changing the work sheet to the chart sheet the monitor of PCWAY will stop All PCWAY macros will stop followed by the stopping of the monitor of PCWAY Interval Timer Weekly Timer and File Processing will not be stopped Chapter 3 Overview HARDWARE 3 1 Overview on Hardware PCWAY can be used with all network environments listed below MEWNET H C NET RS232C Modem Not Connect Ethernet Local Ethernet Remote USB It is not possible to use the networks listed above together Concerning the PLC s which is connected with the computer through RS232C or the PLC s which are connected to the computer through a modem it is possible to communicate as node o When the MEWNET H P W link unit is attached to the PLC s which is connected by RS232C as above then it is possible to access other PLCs situated at the same level by the following Go to Settings pull down menu at Operation Preferences and select Option Place a check
171. ers have reached the specified number Continue Processing Continues the processing in order to constantly have the newest record numbers saved Stop processing Finishes the file processing 8 Set the event to turn ON when full Set if there is an event which you would like to turn ON when the data is full 9 Type Select the field type which you will specify for each of the fields Date month day year 4digits MM DD YYYY Time hour minute second HH MM SS Integer Long 2147483648 214748483648 range Real num Double 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 range Char storable up to 32 characters 10 Method If the field type selected with the Type is to be assigned to the field in the lower column on the File Master dialog box select the method by which that is to be done Only specified Set only the field type of the specified No at Type in File Master dialog box All after specified field Set all of the field types after the specified No s at Type at the very bottom of the File Master dialog box 11 Digits after decimal point real number Set the digit numbers below the decimal point The settings here will influence all of the fields of real number type When the field type is the real number or the character then it is applicable 12 Type By left clicking this the field type which has been selected at specify field type will be specified 13 Comment Input the comment Menu bar e File F
172. etails regarding the settings refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences E e Operation Preferences Line connection is carried out in the sequence described below 1 Start Phone line connection is performed manually with Modem Support by storing the various remote region settings telephone number etc at Modem Support For more information regarding settings refer to the Help supplied with Modem Support J s NoTe Set the use for the RS232C port on the PLC side to perform the computer link 2 Calls up PCWAY dials the specified phone number and waits for a response If a normal response is given phone line connection is made If an error response is given or if a response is not given after a certain period of time connection is not made The waiting time is set at Modem Support 3 Read the PLC status After connection is established PCWAY will read the statuses of the PLC node numbers set at Connection No P in order If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read a retry will be attempted at least once J s ote Regarding the amount of retries If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read retries will be attempted until the time set for Public Line Timeout elapses If the status cannot be read by then that PLC will be considered to be disconnected 4 Inform PLC of phone line connection To inform the connected status to the PLCs that are considered to be connected the informing re
173. eting Reception Port No mm 1 For deleting settings select deleted port number in the right field to click M 2 Selected port number move to Reception Port No field and then delete it there Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures 6 18 E mail Setting e Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt E mail Setting L e Click 7 E E mail Setting x File Edit Option Help 1 T Executes E mail Operation Preferences Item Explanations 1 Executes E mail Place a check mark in this check box when sending and receiving the e mail is executed When a check mark is not placed in this box e mail processing is not executed even if the required data are entered e Operation Preferences EI PCWAY E mail Configuration x Server 2 gt SMTP 3 Pops m Operation Preferences 7 gt Send interval time fi min s P 9 m Private 1 2 Mail address 13 Name m Incoming Mail Server I Receives the E mail Account name Connection settings Password J Use Dial up connections Connection name Folder
174. ettings for each of the numbers Left click the field type under Type for the type which has been registered already at 1 and 2 Specify field type Type pate Method only specified Digits after decimal point No Y O a e A However if None has been set before for the field type this field type cannot be selected for the current field type which you would like to set Change the former field type settings to something else The field number is from 1 to 256 Change the field number using the scrawl bar located at the very right side Input a simple comment for the processing which you have set J norte After you have performed the file processing the field type can be added however for the field type which has been already specified this cannot be altered 6 6 File Processing e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt File Processing O e Click kA File Processing File E Edit E Field Copy C Help H Execution no Le Comment m Execute Specify corresponding file T Yes File No ons Reference Filenmef Record quantity p Write mae m Select contents of process Contents of execution PLC gt Collect data to this file z p File execution startup timing and action afterward Trigger device u Relay link Ic turns on to start file execution Informing relay JV Execute After The croatian Sort 1 z Relay R z o turns on while trigger is on Inform
175. eturn value Saved HTML file name with full path What to be careful of when saving the HTML format 1 When there happens to exist a several number of sheets in a book it is necessary to do the settings at Update All Sheet Data before saving the book LN Either click the of Update All Sheet Data or go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Update All Sheet Data 2 For a file name saved in File name automatically saving process above the extension htm is added to the target book name and the file is created in the same folder as the target file At this time the target book is also overwritten To specify file names and folders use File name designation saving process above When files and folders have already been saved as HTML automatically they are overwritten to save When a book is newly created xls and htm files are saved in PCWAY work folder Pe 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line 4 8 1 The Difference between Less than 65 and 65 or More Remote Locations Public telephone lines can be used to monitor information at remote PLCs in up to 4 096 regions and to display and operate data and save data to files Once a remote PLC is connected to the public phone lines you are able to use all the functions provided with PCWAY The functions that can be executed may differ depending on how many PLCs are connected When there are less than 64 remote regions 1 Even if the network confi
176. event at a certain interval Interval Timer Turn ON the PLC relay and the event at a specified time at a specified date Starts automatically the macro which the user has prepared The WAV file is generated at a specified time Weekly Timer Auto Macro Startup Sound Startup The event is turned ON by the changing of the PLC relay relay link area Connects with distant PLC s through the modem Updates all sheet information inside the book Updates all sheet information of a currently active sheet PCWAY is connected to one PLC through RS 232C or Ethernet and communicates with other PLCs through the PLC link unit Event Startup Modem Support Update All Sheet Data Update Active Sheet Data Operation Preferences Option Use Link unit No By performing the compiling PCWAY acts with high speed performance Operation Preferences Option Sheet data no refresh mode Transfers the execution environment such as data registered for the PCWAY to another personal computer Backup Utility 2 3 Basic Specifications register value Item Specification The number of cells which can set to the PLC relay 8191 cells register and the event on to one sheet The number of files which can be displayed on to one 100 files sheet Maximum number of cells which can be downloaded 8191 cells to the PLC at once Character Change by ON and OFF of the relay and 100 t
177. f Error Reception The PLC for informing of errors must adhere to the conditions given below e If there is only one remote PLC and it is C NET connection with a C NET adapter then the PLC that dials the phone number must be set to node number 1 e f the COM Port selected for Communication Settings S for Network is the same as the COM Port selected for Communication Settings A for Error Reception If the remote PLC is equipped with a MEWNET H link unit and you also want to access a PLC of the same level with a different node number place a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box This allows access to other PLC node numbers e f the COM Port selected for Communication Settings S for Network is different from the COM Port selected for Communication Settings A for Error Reception Basically only the PLC with the node number 1 can be accessed However by placing a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the PLC node number that is accessible can be changed to 0 Removing the check makes the PLC with the node number 1 accessible 1 Place a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in the Operation
178. f Even Error Reception Fi Dial mode Pulse Tone C Others ATDP Numb f ions PAD acl d Time out fic x sec I Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 j p Tim Public Line Time out 60 7 sec Pulse Width Settings Ret Modem Command amp T Command 1 Relay ON T o0 pares nas slain ATVIEOS0 1 2 43 Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY J Communication Settings A Ls The Read Register setting is required at the PLC When there are less than 65 PLCs connected Click the Modem Support button and then All Settings to set the Read Register File E Settings C Help H IE Modem Support x poe ope Fie HelptH PC Type ren PC AT z Network C NET Con Sin Ong Limited Net Type MODEM No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments Communication 1 vo No Settings 3 2 2 2 V1 vi No Ri vo 3 3 3 V2 V2 No R2 vo IV Receive Permit the 4 4 4 vo vo No RO vo hae im 5 5 5 VO vo No RO vo 6 6 6 VO vo No RO vo 7a 2 WO vo No RO vo 6 8 8 vo vO No RO vo 9 9 9 vo vo No RO vo Number of regions 10 10 10 VO vo No RO vo 111 11 VO vo No RO vo I Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 bitai Set All Trigger v E I Yes Interrupt Trigger v o J Yes Terminate Trigger v o J Yes Read Register DT o H _ ll Settings A No of Retries l 0 Times Resend Wait Time 90 Sec
179. f the 1st word for Read Register are ignored 2 This process is only recognized if an error is received If you want to check the contents of the error it will be necessary to link the event set by the 2nd word of the Read Register with the single trigger or ongoing trigger at the Modem Support dialog box and resume connection Below is the explanation when the same serial port is set for the modem and error reception 4 The event stored in the 2nd word of the Read Register is turned on If H FFFF is stored in the 2nd word of the read register then it will not be processed 5 Read the PLC status From here operation is based on the contents of numbers registered at Modem Support and stored in the 1st word of the Read Register After connection is established PCWAY will read the statuses of the PLC node numbers set at Connection No P in order If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read a retry will be attempted at least once J s NoTe Regarding the amount of retries If there is a PLC whose status cannot be read retries will be attempted until the time set for Public Line Timeout elapses If the status cannot be read by then that PLC will be considered to be disconnected If the status of none of the set PLC nodes can be read connection is severed 6 Inform PLC of phone line connection To inform the connected status to the PLCs that are considered to be connected for the node numbers specified at N
180. f the time when you will have the device turned to ON 3 Node Select the device node number 4 Device Select the device which you will to turn ON 5 Output Format Select either Pulse or Level When you have chosen V Event at Device you can only select Level 6 Comments Imputable up to 24 characters Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Set whether to execute directly from the initial overview window or not Click the box on the left side of No If there has been placed a check mark the execution will be performed In order to do each of the settings first choose the row of the No where you would like to do the settings By left clicking the Details button the details window of Interval Timer will be displayed With this do the necessary settings File E Help H Format Comments OOOOOOOOCdS a a RUTELE ee e Details window 1 When you will perform the execution of the registered contents place a check mark at Execute Ba Interval Timer xj Interval 15ec gt Node fa v Device JR ia Output Format Puise a Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H 2 Set the interval of the time when you will turn ON the device at Interval By left clicking the
181. f there has been placed a check mark then the execution will be performed from this window In order to do each of the settings first select the row of No which you would like to set at By left clicking the Details command button the details window of Auto Macro Startup will be displayed With this do the necessary settings Uy Auto Macro Startup x File E Help H Macro Name e Details Screen 1 Place a check mark at Execute if you would like to execute the contents which you have registered before fj Auto Macro Startup 2 Set the device which starts the execution at Trigger vl wy Auto Macro Startup 3 Select the number which has been set at C NET Settings for C NET No The settings will be displayed only when the net Network Type of Operation Preferences is Modem When this is not MODEM then the setting items will not be displayed After clicking the Browse command button the C NET Settings window will be displayed By going from File at C NET Settings Select current No and finish this number will be chosen and will return to the Auto Macro Startup window Concerning the details for each of the registerings 6 11 C NET Settings jAuto Macro Startup 4 After the executing has been completed if there is a relay event which you would like to turn to ON do the settings for Informing Relay and Informing Event However if you have selected M Relay link at T
182. f you will execute file processing or the Microsoft Excel macro use this informing event as the trigger 10 Comment Input comment up to 40 characters 11 Node When the line has been connected between the PCWAY and PLC select the node for which the informing relay is to be turned on Multiple nodes may be selected e All Settings Modem Support a 4 gt Set All Trigger v Tss 2 Interrupt Trigger Vv o J Yes 3 gt Terminate Trigger y o J Yes 4 Read Register DT o 5 10 of Retries 0 Times 6 Resend Wait Time 90 Sec 90 999 7 Next Connection Time 90 gec 0 999 Set All Trigger When the event number registered here turns ON then all of the Single Trigger set at Details will be turned ON Ongoing Trigger will not be turned ON After this the Set All Trigger will be turned OFF automatically Use this when you would like to connect all of the registered regions sequentially in a rotating manner rotates and connects only once automatically Interrupt Trigger When there are a several Single Trigger under Details which are ON at the same time and when the event number registered here turns ON all of the Single Trigger which have not been executed yet will be put to hold This does not influence the node numbers which are currently connected When the Interrupt Trigger turns OFF the Single Trigger will be executed once again Te
183. g used and the printing method are specified here Save and Exit A Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures The list screen is used to specify whether or not processing is to be carried out Click on the box at the far left to select it If there is a check mark in the box the processing is carried out and if there is no check mark the processing is not carried out To enter a setting first select the row of the No for which a setting is to be entered Clicking with the left button of the mouse on the Details button display the Application Startup screen where detailed booting registrations can be specified for external applications Enter the necessary settings fa Application Startup FilefF View Help H n uo Trigger Relay vent Application File Nane mo 1l RO vo 1 RO 1 R0 1 R0 1 R0 1 R0 1 RO e Details 1 Place check mark at Execute when you will execute the registered contents fix Application Startup xj No 1 Execute Vv Trigger device Informing relay W Notify Node 1 x Relay R gt p Informing event M Notify v o Application File Name Reference R Argument Reference P Comment PageUp U PageDown D Help H 2 These settings are used to boot applications Click with the left button of the mouse ona Trigger device to select it and enter the relay link an
184. ger File E Help H No Trigger C NET No Relay Event Executing Message 2 MO 1 1 RO vo 3 MO 1 1 RO vo 4 MO f 1 RO vo 5 MO ul 1 RO vO O 6 MO al 1 RO vo 7 MO 1 1 RO vo 8 MO 1 1 RO vo 9 MO T 1 RO vO 10 MO L i RO vo 11 MO 1 1 RO vo 12 MO t 1 RO vO 13 MO 1 1 RO vo 14 MO 1 1 RO vo 15 MO 1 1 RO vo 16 MO 1 1 RO vo 17 MO 1 1 RO vo 18 MO 1 1 RO vO O 19 mO 1 1 RO vo x m Details D aS File Trigger No 1 ix 1 gt Execute Yes 2 Trigger Ny 0 C NET No E Browse W 3 4 Informing Relay W Notify Node j Relay R 5 Informing Event MV Notify v 6 gt Executing Message PageUp U PageDown D Help H Item Explanations 1 Execute Place a check mark when you will execute the selected number Trigger Set the device for starting the file processing M Relay link 0 to 255F V Event 0 to 99F C NET No This will be displayed when the Network Type of Operation Preferences is Modem Choose the number from C NET Settings Informing Relay Set this if there is a PLC relay which you would like to turn ON after the file processing However you must make sure to set this when M Relay link has been specified at Trigger Informing Event Set this if there is an event which you would like to turn ON after the file processing
185. gs Sound Name Do the settings for the sound file It is possible to select the file using the Browse B command button Play the sound file which has been set by the Play P command button Comments Imputable up to 40 characters Menu bar e File F 100 Records Added Adds 100 records at a time It is possible to add up to 1000 of these registerings Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Set whether to execute from the initial overview window or not Click the box on the left side of No If there has been placed a check mark here then the executing will be performed In order to do each of the settings first select the row of No which you would like to set at By left clicking the Details command button the details window of Sound Startup will be displayed With this do the necessary settings x File E Help H Sound Name Comments zl Details D e Details window 1 Place check mark at Execute when you will execute the registered contents A Sound Startup x No ja Execute VV esi Trigger fu 0 Sound Name Play P Browse B Comments PageUp U PageDown D Help H 2 Set the device which will start the execution at Trigger E Sound Startup x No 1 Ex
186. gt Digits after decimal point No gt m te omen E Fize access date E fed for number in productim i s sS 4 for number of deteetss sssti lt sSSSSS s w ifeor devect rate si sts sSsCi El Microsof Excel Booki _ File Ed View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY ek TEs WO rele i ee oe EE Al a 2ixi Aw f BE 5 al 1 Target Attribute 2 C Relay C Read Only 3 Register 4 File Data z Event 7 Connection 8 Connection Settings Fo Wirks Only 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Event No 0 18 19 20 21 22 5 Character Change No oo y Character Change 25 26 ar I Next Time Open On Double click 29 30 OK Cancel Delete 31 32 4 3 Booting Microsoft Excel Macros Automatically 4 3 1 What is a macro The function which allows Microsoft Excel to run automatically is called a macro By combining the macro with PCWAY it is possible to automatically generate reports or to change the colors of the charts by the PLC information However you must have to know a lot about the Microsoft Excel macro in order to use this function Please use while referring to the precautions introduced to you later on only after you have understood the basics of the macro system 4 3 2 Creating the Macro 4 3 2 1 Procedures on the making of the macro 1 When something has gone wrong when using the
187. guration for the remote PLCs is different for different regions you are still able to observe all PLCs 2 When connecting from PCWAY to the remote PLC There are two types of connections ongoing connection where connection is maintained until it is severed and single connection where connection is automatically severed after all the remote PLCs are scanned once Also you can have the single connection performed all registered remote regions in rotation 3 When connecting from the remote PLC to PCWAY There are two types of connections as below Normal reception Using the same COM port used for 2 above you can receive data from the PLC Once received you can also have connection maintained until specified Error reception Using the same COM port used in 2 above or another COM port you can receive data from the PLC Once received the required processed are performed and the connection is automatically severed 4 Display functions Data from the remote region can be displayed on sheets using the Microsoft Excel application Miscellaneous The registered telephone numbers cannot be used with other tool software such as FPWIN o there are remote locations in more than 65 but fewer than 4 096 regions r For the network configuration for the remote PLCs a PLC with a node number of 1 is required The informing relay used to inform the PLC of the connection with PCWAY is limited to node number 1 and is turned on
188. have been set 6 Do the necessary operations below while the monitor is in operation These operations can only be done during the running of the monitor Operate the Changing of the relay status Changing of the register value Operation of the continuous change mode of the register value Data downloading of the registered cell For further information on operation refer to 4 1 4 How to operate during the running of the monitoring 7 Stop the monitor i i sme Click the Stop Monitor When you would like to change an operation of the cell settings such as when wishing to correct STOP something at the information setting execute the Stop Monitor Concerning the information settings this can be set during the starting of the monitor However it is necessary to change this part temporarily to another sheet so that the displayed settings can be seen 4 1 2 Setting the cell information Select the cell where you would like to display the current status of the PLC relay or the register value on the Microsoft Excel sheet The setting can be done by either of the three methods introduced to you below 1 Select a cell on the sheet and click the Cell Settings 2 Double click the cell where you would like to display the current status of the PLC relay or the value of the register etc on to the Microsoft Excel sheet 3 Select a cell on the sheet first go from the menu bar to PCWAY and click Cell Settings
189. have registered from Operation Formula ax pei Attribute Ges Read Only Register C Fle Data C Readjwrite C Event Connection Connection Settings Write Only Node No 1 X Device Code DT Data Register Device No o Display Method INUM Numeric vValue x No of Words Operation Formula No peration Formula x me File E Compile C Help H Save S Export _ Select current No and finish L Saye snd Exit AAA Exithy Target Relay Register File Data C Event Connection C Connection Setting Node No 1 Device Code DT Dat Register Device No 0 Display Method NUM Numeric Value No of Words id x Operation Formula No C we Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 6 42 When Error discovered during compiling is displayed make sure to correct the error and then perform the compiling once again When you do not know the reason of the error or the location of the error then go to the menu bar gt Compile C gt Error List D for reference The possible error reasons will be listed here m Operation Formula 6 5 File Master e Go to the menu bar gt Various Types of records O gt File Master F e Click x File E Edit E Help H File base setting File No z Los Comment Record quantity 1 Write node Insert at beginning of file x 5 Display renewal event V0 Treat
190. he device data which has been selected at Specify partners Fixed Char Writes into the file the character which has been inputted at Fixed Char Access method Numeric Processes the data which has been read as the numeric value Input the formula No the No of the next item below Message Processes the data which has been read at the specified Message Input the message No the No of the next item below Char Processes the data which has been read as the character code No Formula No If any kind of operation is to be carried out on the PLC data being Message No To write the contents of Message in the PLC data being read to read and the data is then to be written to a file select the No in Operation Formula a file select the No in Message Specify partner Set the PLC device number which you will read Fixed Char Input when Subject Fixed Char Input within 8 characters When you would like to input more than 8 characters set Subject Fixed Char again Integer Subject None Nothing will be written in to the file PLC Writes in to the file the device data which has been specified at Specify Partner Access method Numeric value Processes the data which has been read as the numerical value integer Input the formula No at No No at the item below No Formula No If any kind of operation is to be carried out on the PLC data
191. he event number will be incremented one by one However it is not possible to copy a several number of cells of which the cell range has been specified or to perform the copying when the Target at Cell Settings dialog box is specified as File Data or Connection 5 4 Paste Cell Settings It is possible to paste the cell by one of the methods introduced to you below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Paste Cell Settings V e Click amp Paste the cell deletion or the copied cell information to the specified cell Specify the pasting direction by go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A Ss a amp e When performing the pasting of the cell one by one prioritizing the downwards direction Select one cell as the original for the copying Go to PCWAY gt Copy Cell Settings C realy X Microsoft Excel Book eal File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat a3 24G hm eae a O It is possible to select a several number of cells which the cell will be copied to Go to PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A gt Downwards D E Specify the cell or cells which you will copy to and go to PCWAY gt Paste Cell Settings V 6 With this the copying will be performed one by one prioritizing the downwards direction When the pasting has reached the very bottom then the pasting will proceed by going to the very top of the next right column X Microsoft Excel Bo
192. he processing for the file such as writing in of the PLC information or the copying of the generation 1 file to the generation 2 file in order to do the backup It is necessary to set the PLC register with every field item of the file wnen saving PLC information into the file For instance it is necessary to set DTO of node number 1 for the number of production field and for the defect field then DT1 of node number 1 should be set For such a situation such a program of the PLC which would store the number of production into DTO and number of defects into DT1 becomes necessary The field for data and time will be written in automatically by the clock of the computer when the file processing has started Usually it is possible to register a number of file processings for one file type For instance usually you would write in PLC information into Generation 1 file However when this becomes full it is possible to copy the Generation 1 file to the Generation 2 file Throughout the entire PCWAY program the number of file processings which you can register in all is 2000 entries It is not possible to download the data which has been saved into the file before to the PLC Communicating with the File Processing trigger When the trigger turns to ON the file processing will be executed The trigger of above is the trigger for the Relay Relay link area M or the event V By deciding the exact timing when to turn ON this
193. he register of the PLC Also we explain about the PCWAY event and the trigger and the informing which takes place with the internal processing 1 Explanation on the Relay With PCWAY the relay of the PLC is expressed as the relay The acceptance of the usage of the relay and the possible range for the relay numbers for usage varies by the PLC type which is adopted for use 1 X External Input X of PLC External input Only possible to READ 2 Y External Output Y of PLC External output Possible to READ and WRITE 3 R Internal Relay R of PLC Internal relay and also the special internal relay concerning the internal relay READ and Write is possible With the special internal relay it is possible to only READ 4 T Timer T of PLC Timer Relay Only possible to READ Cannot WRITE 5 C Counter C of PLC Counter Relay Only possible to READ Cannot WRITE 6 L Link Relay L of PLC Link relay Possible to Read and WRITE 7 M Relay Link Area This is the most important area used for the trigger introduced later on in this manual Only possible to READ e When using the MEWNET H link board When the relay link range has been set with the MEWNET H Setting Software independently sold the recognition starting from MO will be possible e When using the C NET RS232C network type As the same as the MEWNET H with PCWAY it is possible to set the relay link area simultaneously b
194. heck in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears Ee Operation Preferences Dogan amp wo NER H o 1 2 3 4 5 6 z 8 9 10 11 PREP eR RR oan in bw ND PREP eB Re RB JaN bwON eH e Using the public phone lines you can keep track of the data from remote PLCs max 64 regions display the data perform operations with the data and save the data as files Once a remote PLC is connected to the public phone lines you are able to use all the functions provided with PCWAY Communication Click the aS button for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box Choose MODEM for Network Type and properly set the communication settings Ea File E Settings C Help H Sao x S Communication Setting Operation Preferences X E Network type PC Type IBM PC AT C NET RS232C COM port i T MEWNET H ea Baud rate No Connection Net Type MODEM aud fate Eiana Local Initialize Communication A Settings 3 m Data length y C 7bits 8bits Help 3 Permit thi sal M Receive eee stop bt Error Reception 1 bit 2bits Setrarige ey Parity Number of regions Non C Odd C Even Over 65 Regions Modem Support _ Dial mode Pulse Width Settings C Pulse Tone C Others faror
195. hich you would like to register Left click within File No and select Then input the comment After you have inputted the comment when you would like to have the comment displayed right after the of the File No you must select temporarily a different number and then return to the former area With this the comment which you have inputted will be displayed after the of the File No 2 File Name Input the file name 3 Record Quantity Input the quantity of records within 1 to 30 000 record ranges 4 Write Mode Select the mode to write By left clicking within Write Mode Insert at beginning of file Insert at end of file will be displayed Select which write mode you will use 5 Display renewal event zx Set the display renewal event This will be used dominantly with Update Ere Pipe Method when set as Do not update at Cell A Settings File data Cees Eee When set as Do not update then the event will Connection ae not be displayed despite the file data being Moye es joii renewed j Therefore when Display renewal event which Hets Zl Floto Reference has been set is turned ON the file data will be Generation emerson o redisplayed Display Method inlay AlRecords atone When there is no need to redisplay the file data then there is no need to do the settings Update Method Do Not Update yy IV Next Time Open On Double click e Treatment when file data is full The processing for whe
196. ic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd In accordance with the change the install destination default and work folder has been changed When PCWAY Ver2 80 or later version has been installed into the default install folder the install destination is different from the one for the previous version The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 73 or older Install destination C Program Files PCWAY Work file C Program Files PVWAY The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 76 or older Install destination C Program Files Panasonic MEW Control PCWAY Work file C Panasonic MEW Documents PCWAY The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 80 or later Install destination C Program Files Panasonic EW Control PCWAY Work file C Panasonic EW Documents PCWAY The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 82 or later Install destination C Program Files Panasonic EW SUNX Control PCWAY Work file C Panasonic EW SUNX Documents PCWAY PCWAY folder is created under the install folder specified for the installation The work folder is always Bood drive Panasonic EW Documents PCWAY When overwrite install is performed the previous setting data will be automatically moved to the above folder e Supports Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit and 64 bit versions e Supports Microsoft Excel2010 e Previous versions 2 can be updated to this version or later e Corrected the error
197. ified saving process of Microsoft Excel file name File name TEST Dim Filename as String Filename Application Run PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType TEST Menubar Toolbar registration function e Cell Settings Sub PCWAYsubSetCell e Delete Cell Settings Sub PCWAYsubCellDel e Copy Cell Settings Sub PCWAYsubCellCopy e Paste Cell Settings Sub PCWAYsubCellPaste e Set Cell Order No Action Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveNo e Set Cell Order Down word Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveDown e Set Cell Order To the Right Sub PCWAYsubCellMoveRight e Start PCWAY Sub PCWAYsubShellPcwayStart e Exit PCWAY Sub PCWAYsubExecuteStop e Read PCWAY Settings Again Sub PCWAYsubExecuteRestart e Start Monitor Sub PCWAYsubRunStart e Stop Monitor Sub PCWAYsubRunStop e Download Data Sub PCWAYsubDownLoad e Update All Sheet Data with message Sub PCWAYsubRefresh e Update All Sheet Data without message Sub PCWAYsubRefreshNoMessage e Update Active Sheet Data with message Sub PCWAYsubSheetRefresh e Update Sheet Data without message Sub PCWAYsubSheetRefreshNoMessage Argument 1 as String Argumenti Sheet name that renews information In the case that argument 1 was omitted or in the case that was specified the active sheet is renewed Example Renews the information of Sheet no 2 Call Application Run PCWAYsubSheetRefreshNoMessage Sheet2 e SaveExcel File fixed File name Present file name YYMMDDHHMMSS Sub PCWAYsubFileSave e Save Excel File possible to specify file
198. igger the corresponding internal processing File Processing etc will be carried out Then the currently active Microsoft Excel sheet is updated Operation of Phone Line Disconnection The processes for phone line disconnection are to be performed in the order given below 1 Start of phone line disconnection Severing of the phone line connection for ongoing connection starts when the specified event V turns off For single connection severing of the phone line connection starts when the displayed sheet data during connection is completely updated If information is being communicated back and forth between the trigger device for the internal processing file processing etc and the information relay between two or more PLCs however the cutoff processing does not begin until the communication processing has been completed For example if the informing relay turned on because the internal PCWAY processing completed but the trigger device at the PLC did not turn off Also when the PLC data in the currently active Microsoft Excel sheet is not all updated disconnection starts after all the data is updated 2 Inform PLC of phone line disconnection For the node numbers specified at Node in the dialog box displayed by clicking the Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box the informing relay is turned off 3 Phone line disconnection Form of Phone Line Connection e Single Trigger and Ongoing Trigger Ther
199. in the Operation Preferences dialog box and click the ee button Then perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears EH Operation Preferences x MODEM Over 65 Regions Informing Relay Node 1 Ir gt 0 Informing Event IV Inform v 0 Read Register Node l DT 0 Connection No P meno ewn _ Set the Informing Relay for informing the PLCs when connections are made The Informing Relay is set to on only for the PLC with the node number 1 Cornection No iP Click the button and place a check at node number 1 in the dialog box that appears It is also possible for informing to the informing event 4 8 1 2 Connecting to PLCs from a Personal Computer Place a check in the Receive check box for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box to allow reception of transmissions from the PLCs Click the button and perform the required settings in the dialog box that appears ls Operation Preferences x P Operation Preferences x gt fs Z C Program Files PCWAY ee ee If the Event to confirm the connection turns on within the Waiting time to confirm the connection or if a check is placed in the Event automatically turn on check box then the phone line connection is maintained If the Event to confirm the connection turns off or if it does not go on within the Waiting time to confirm the connection then the phone line is disconnec
200. ing event IV Execute After the execution event vfo Turn on P Message during execution access Message No CESES EA mnr E Z ea ee a e el a ee i el eee ee eee C et r aara a Item Explanations E one 1 Execution No Possible to register from 1 to 2000 If it s checking mark at the Yes check box it adds before No after saving the data of File Processing 2 Comment Input the comment 3 Execute Place a check mark at the Yes check box when you would like to execute 4 File No Select the file number which has been created at the File Master dialog box With the Reference command button the File Master dialog box will be displayed By going to File gt Select current No and finish it is possible to select from here also 5 Contents of execution Left click within Contents of execution and select out of what will be displayed e PLC gt Collect data to this file Writes in the data read from the PLC to the specified file By executing this processing at the first execution the first generation initial file 1 will be made and data will be gathered to this After the second execution the gathered data only will be executed e 1st generation file 1 gt moved to 2nd generation file 2 Transfers 1st generation file newly created to the 2nd generation file The first generation file will be deleted e 1st generati
201. ion under lt Receive All Settings gt in All settings A dialog box El Ethernet Remote X 4 Event automatically turn on Destination port No 1 1 gt Reception Source St No fz gt General Reception 2 gt Reception Connection Permission Event v 0 3 Reception Connection Permission Wait Time s gt min cen tein 1 Destination port No Enter the port number of the personal computer receiving communication from PLCs Note The port number is not required without checking the ET LAN unit check box in previous Details window Entry of the port number is required only in use of the ET LAN unit for PLCs Enter different node number from the Source St No in Detail window Following settings from 1 to 3 are applied in Reception mode The settings are invalid in Error Reception mode 2 Reception Connection Permission Event Line ON OFF is inferred from this event ON OFF after connecting line from PLCs 3 Reception Connection Permission Wait Time It is time of waiting for above Reception Connection Permission Event turned ON The event turned ON within this setting time remains on line until the event turned OFF while the event not turned ON cut the line with achieving limited time 4 Event automatically turn on With checking the check box the Reception Connection Permission Event set above is turned on and the connection is remained until the event turned off e Al
202. ious events can be turned on individually ag eNoTe It is also possible to turn the event ON only with one certain sheet that is active 4 6 2 Have PCWAY recognize the relay which will be watched as the link relay In order to have the relay constantly watched it is necessary to have PCWAY recognize this relay as the link relay area The method for this varies by the network type When MEWNET H It is possible to have the internal relay R or the link relay L recognized as the relay link area M using the MEWNET H setting software independently sold For further information refer to the MEWNET H link unit manual When C NET RS 232C By setting PCWAY C NET Settings it is possible to have the internal relay R or the link relay L recognized as the relay link area M at every PLC node number For further information refer to 6 11 C NET Settings When using Modem By setting PCWAY C NET Settings it is possible to have the internal relay R or the link relay L as the relay link area M at every PLC node number For further information refer to 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line and 6 11 C NET Settings 4 6 3 Perform the event startup It is possible to watch the OFF gt ON or ON gt OFF changing of the link relay area and turn ON each of the different events For further information refer to 6 8 Event Startup When you would like to watch the OFF gt ON changing of link relay MO and turn event VO to ON se
203. ipment monitored by the PLC can be sent from to the specified PC and cellular phone s e mail address using the e mail function 4 9 1 Overview 1 E mail function environment available for PCWAY Local area network LAN connection Dial up connection Dial up connection setting using the PC is required For details refer to the operation manual for the PC you use 2 Specifying the recipient address Use the e mail address or character string When the character string is specified PCWAY receives the e mail if the received e mail includes the specified character string 3 Messages that can be sent from PCWAY Up to 256 characters in one byte characters One message per e mail can be sent Microsoft Excel Sheet data One specified Microsoft Excel Sheet range per e mail Example A1 C3 4 Files can be attached to an e mail using PCWAY All files Book in use with PCWAY can be sent after all Sheets are updated optionally Compressed files LZH format self extracting file can be sent optionally For details concerning the settings above refer to 6 18 E mail Setting 4 9 2 Sending the Error Status Information to the PC and the Cellular Phone via E mail PCWAY monitors the PLC internal relay RO and sends the equipment status information to the PC and the cellular phone via e mail when the internal relay RO changes from OFF to ON e When the error signal input from the equipment is X0 Internal relay RO Informing
204. ired settings in the dialog box that appears For more details regarding the settings refer to 6 1 Setting Operation Preferences EE Operation Preferences X When the PLC makes a phone line connection PCWAY reacts by performing the processes given below 1 Receive phone call When the phone call is received from the PLC if the Event turns on within the Waiting time connection is maintained If it does not turn on connection is severed Also if a check is placed in the Event automatically turn on check box connection is made 2 Reads the read register At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word Fixed to K1 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on specified in HEX 3rd word Fixed to K1 Reads three words of the PLC data at the read register set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions O button at the Operation Preferences dialog box Since the data value that becomes the event number is stored in the data value of the 2nd word that event is set to on 3 Inform PLC of phone line connection To inform of the connected status to the PLCs that are considered to be connected it is necessary to register the informing relay The Informing Relay is set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions O button for Number of regions in the Operations Preferences dialog box Since the informing relay only turns on for the PLC at no
205. isconnection The processes for phone line disconnection are to be performed in the order given below 1 Phone line disconnection Cutting of the phone line connection is performed manually using Modem Support However if interaction between the trigger device informing relay for internal processing file processing etc is between PLCs and incomplete disconnection will not start until that processing is finished For example if the informing relay turned on because the internal PCWAY processing completed but the trigger device at the PLC did not turn off Also when the PLC data in the currently active Microsoft Excel sheet is not all updated disconnection starts after all the data is updated 2 Inform PLC of phone line disconnection The informing relay specified for node number 1 turns off 3 Phone line disconnection Form of Phone Line Connection e Modem Support Phone line connection is performed manually using Modem Support Connection is made with the contents entered at this screen After connection the processing for the informing relay for node number 1 and informing event set in the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions button for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box is performed For disconnection use Modem Support and perform the disconnection manually using the same procedures used to for connection For more information regarding Modem Support refer to the Help supp
206. it number of the PLC to be connected J s NoTe If more than one GT32 GT05 are connected to a computer using devices such as USB hubs the PCWAY or GT32 GT05 may operate unusually Do not connect more than one GT32 GT05 to a computer Chapter 4 Basic Operations of PCWAY Displaying and Operating PLC Data Information with Microsoft Excel 4 1 1 Outline of the Basic Procedures 1 Start Microsoft Excel Add Ins 2 x First from the tool bar Tools click Add ins Add Ins available f Analysis ToolPak Confirm if there has been placed a check mark at TT Analysis ToolPak VBA a PCWAY English aeae g IV Conditional Sum Wizard the check mark indicates that the add in of IM Lookup Wizard Browse PCWAY has been performed acres bok aa cee aa M pcway Loager 7 Template Utilities I Update Add in Links Z e What to do when PCWAY add in has not been performed Have you not chosen No to the displayed question Is Microsoft Excel installed at the starting point during the installing procedure If so go to Microsoft Excel menu bar gt Tools gt Add ins and click Browse then select PCWAY xla from the folder where PCWAY has been installed into e In case when although the add in of PCWAY has been performed the menu bar or the tool bar etc has not been displayed onto the screen Go to Start at windows gt Programs gt PCWAY gt Operation Preferences a
207. ith this the selection will be canceled however the operations of Select current No and finish will not be possible Character Change File E Help H Save S Export Seveard we PY f menor C Character input Edit display color l Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CT ae E background color CT iat When registered at Character Change Cell Settings aixi Cwracter Change No Character Change File F Help H freiect No OK 1 1 Clear Pelection it es tee ElGimranter dope Terget C Edit display color Relay C Reger Select color C Fie Data Background color Yes No C Event ee 7 Select character color Konnection connect Stes BEBE TT Select background color cl BEBEETT Character Charge to Q Character Change F Nest Tine Open On Double oe Cornel Delta 6 30 6 3 Message e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Message G e Click This is about the registering procedures for changing the character and color which will be displayed using the PLC word device value It is possible to register 0 to 4096 messages for one topic C Edit display color Select color Background color C Yes No gt Select character color EHEHEH Select background color EHEHEHE
208. ition see the online help of the product for details of the way of use Would you please Tell us if you find something dubious or of errors in this manual despite our heed to publication of the booklet as possible Table of Contents 1 Installation of POWAY ssisciiisssccestsasstcasancccctascuecnssieuassatsnwnsnarendsn 1 1 1 1 System Configuration scnccitc0i cenctdulacdstdalaonancelnaneddaseal aeanaeds daansedeaeaudessaezeecesacs 1 2 1 2 Version Up trom Ver1 or Ver a an ea ee a ee 1 4 1 3 Installing coveted eeeetetversevets erxevrt cereveti ees diets EAEE EEKEUR UNETAN AUA arta ets 1 5 14 Verity the Installing manana ea e AE AaS 1 6 2 Overview PCWAYV sccxcc secs ecce ted eed Seta l ee li hae tend inaani ians 2 1 251 SPOW AN Memory A Gasscnsanussoonnannnsonnel uia iaee 2 2 2 1 1 Explanation on the Relay cc ccecccseeceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeneeeeecaeeeeaaeeesaaeeenaaes 2 2 2 1 2 Explanation on the Register cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaees 2 4 2 1 3 Explanation on the Event ccccecccseeeeseeeeeeeee eee sence eecaeeeeaaeeesaaeeenaaes 2 5 2 1 4 Explanation on the Trigger and the informing ce ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeee ee ee 2 6 2 2 Basie Operations or POWAY 24 64 ce ew eee eee a eee 2 9 2 3 BasiG SPECIICALONS aie4 co seoncaanecnensacnGeaGncaGneaencaGueda 2 12 E NOC pet ia ett ta Nt Bi ee teacaca st oeecen se entecac T 2 13 225 gt PrecaUtIONS oi ceneeastcnessariceeeebeicnks oe
209. k upped Cancel The process is ended 8 6 PCWAY Logger When you would like to access continuous area in PLC by full speed And when you would like to read the IC Card for FP2 and the extension memory for FP 2 Please use this PCWAY Logger Add in software This PCWAY Logger Add in software is need to Microsoft Excel 97 or upper version J s NoTe It is necessary to start PCWAY before you execute this Add in software This Add in software is not able to use any registering module of PCWAY For example Character Changing Message Operation Formula etc To add in PCWAY Logger first click on Add in Registration and Control under Tools on Microsoft Excel menu bar and then press the Reference button and double click on the PCWAY Logger xla file in the folder used to install PCWAY usually this is located under Program Files PCWAY When you would like to know how to use this Add in software please refer to sample Macro program of LoggerSample xls file Usually this file is located under Program Files PCWAY Sample When you would like to execute this Macro program it is necessary for you to register at the Automatic Macro Startup or relate to the button on the Microsoft Excel Form Basic flow to display the PLC data to Microsoft Excel sheet 1 Upload the data from PLC to PCWAY LOGGER Internal memory 2 Copy the value from PCWAY LOGGER Internal memory to Clipboard 3 Paste the value from Clipboard
210. l Settings EN Ethernet Remote r Send All Settings 1 set All Trigger y o J Yes 2 Interrupt Trigger y o J Yes 3 gt Terminate Trigger v 0 Yes 4 gt 1o of Retries 0 Times 5 gt Resend Wait Time 90 Sec 0 999 6 gt Send Line fa 7 m Receive All Settings 7 gt Reception Receive 8 Error Reception Receive Q Read Register DT o 1 0 gt Receive Line fo v 11 Reception Port No 1025 32767 za Exit E pe Send All Settings Setting for connection from a personal computer to PLCs 1 Set All Trigger When event number entered here is turned ON all Single Trigger specified in the main window are turned ON The ongoing trigger is not turned on Later this set all triggers are automatically turned OFF Use the trigger to link connect all entered destinations automatically 2 Interrupt Trigger If each Single Trigger in Details window is turned ON entered event number that is turned ON sets any current Single Trigger that has not yet executed wait The node number during connecting is not affected As soon as this interrupt trigger is turned off the Single Trigger re start processing 3 Terminate Trigger If each Single Trigger in Details window is turned ON entered event number that is turned ON sets any current Single Trigger that has not yet executed turned off 4 No of retries Enter how many retries for
211. l number Start the macro using this relay link as the trigger Such performances are possible For further information on the registering refer to 6 9 Weekly Timer and 6 10 Interval Timer Starting the macro using the relay link as the trigger In order to turn ON the relay link with the PLC in order to have PCWAY recognize the turning ON of the relay link it is necessary to create a program at the PLC side which will have this relay link which becomes the trigger put to self hold Use Informing Relay in order to cancel the self hold state Ya EXAMPLE When starting the macro automatically link relay LO informing relay RO Preconditions It is necessary to have PCWAY recognize link relay LO as relay link MO When MEWNET H Use MEWNET H setting software independently sold When C NET or the Modem refer to 6 11 C NET Settings Program at the PLC side XO RO LO DF H LO By XO turning to ON LO will be put to self hold Operation of PCWAY When LO has turned to ON PCWAY will start the macro and turn ON RO after this After PCWAY confirms that LO has turned to OFF PCWAY will turn RO to OFF Starting the macro using the event as the trigger When using the event as the trigger after executing the macro PCWAY will turn this event to OFF 4 4 Turn on the Relay Event at a Specified Time or ata Certain Interval 4 4 1 Turn the Relay and Event to On at the Specified Time of the Specified Day of
212. lable in this function refer to 8 6 PCWAY Logger 7 7 Upgrade items of Ver2 76 e PCWAY logger supports USB for GT32 GT05 For the details refer to the list of functions described in the Appendix PCWAY Logger of Help Connectable GT32 GTO05 is only one unit It cannot be connected to GT32 GT05 connected to multiple USB For the details refer to Overview HARDWARE and USB Connection in the Manual or Help 7 8 Upgraded items of Ver2 80 e Our corporate name has been changed to Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd from Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Along with this change each install destination default and work folder has been chagned The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 73 or older Install destination C Program Files PCWAY Work file C Program Files PVWAY The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 76 or older Install destination C Program Files Panasonic MEW Control PCWAY Work file C Panasonic MEW Documents PCWAY The install destination default and work folder for Ver2 80 or later Install destination C Program Files Panasonic EW Control PCWAY Work file C Panasonic EW Documents PCWAY When Ver2 80 is overwrite installed all the environments of the previous version will be taken over so that it can be used as is eC eC Ue 7 9 Upgraded items of Ver2 82 e The corporate name Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd has been changed to Panason
213. lay Link 1 OOmsec Net Type MODEM File Processing 1 00msec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 00msec Permit the iv i Pi M Receive PEST rrr Event Hold Field Hold Range Start No 0 100 Error Reception EEE w a Fora Entire Range Number of regions I Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 Timeout Settings Pulse Width Settings Retry ON Relay ON Time 1 OOmsec Interval s min Work Folder c Program Files PCWAY Drive W Modem Support 0 p Click the _ tose sporeta button that appears and set the read register informing relay and other settings Modem Support x File E Help H pei o o ooo C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments 1 1 VO VO o vo 2 2 2 V1 Vi No Ri vo 3 3 3 V2 V2 No R2 vo 4 4 4 vo vO No RO vO 5 5 5 vo vo No RO vO 6 6 6 vo vo No RO vo O R 7 Vvo vO No RO vo 8 8 8 vo vO No RO vo O 9 9 9 vo vo No RO vo O 10 10 10 VO vo No RO vo Zi La 2a VO vo No RO vO O 12 12 12 VO vo No RO vO O 13 13 13 VO vo No RO vo O 14 14 14 VO vo No RO vo 15 15 15 VO vo No RO vo C 16 16 16 VO vo No RO vO G 1717 17 VO vo No RO vo O 18 16 18 vo vO No RO vO x All Settings A Details D You can change the PLC configuration for each region You can set multiple node numbers for the informing relay node number 4 43 e When 65 o
214. lay color has been specified click at Message of the data value which you would like to change The color will change to the currently selected color File E Edit E Help H No 1 Machine Condition Comment Machine Condition Message RUN Character input Data value E Select color Background color Yes C No ee _ Ts I Select character color J CEE mininin E 7 UES E s A gt Select background color ENNEA 3 When all of the inputting has been completed go to the menu bar gt File gt Save gt Exit or to Select current No and finish and the registering procedures will be completed However Select current No and finish is selectable only when you have registered at Message at the Cell Settings dialog box The number which is displayed at No will be also displayed at Message No at the Cell Settings dialog box 6 4 Operation Formula e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Operation Formula E e Click Gad When you will perform an operation when you will display operate the value of the PLC word device when you will store this in to the file data then it is necessary to register the operation formula E Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H A ON Item Explanations 1 No Possible to register from 1 to 100 2 Comment Input comment up to 8
215. lay specified for node number 1 is turned off first and then turned on again When this relay turns on the PLC can verify the condition of the phone line connection This Informing Relay is set at the dialog box displayed by clicking the Over 65 Regions O button in the Operation Preferences dialog box Then click the ei e h button and set the PLC connection node number by placing a check at node number 1 in the dialog box that appears Be sure to set the connection node number to 1 If an error occurs on the PLC side it is assumed that the information relay may still be on from the previous connection so the relay is turned off first and then turned on again The period of time for which the relay is off can be specified using the Relay ON Time setting for Pulse Width Settings under Operation Preferences 5 Turn on the informing event If an Informing Event is set at the dialog box displaying by clicking the Over 65 Regions button the informing event turns on after the informing relay turns on It is also possible to have other internal PCWAY processes file processing etc work together with this event 6 PLC surveillance First the link relay area set with C NET Settings is checked If a relay link area that is on is set as a trigger the corresponding internal processing file processing etc will be carried out Then the currently active Microsoft Excel sheet is updated PR Operation of Phone Line D
216. lied with Modem Support Handling of Connection Errors 1 If the condition of the phone line becomes faulty during connection and the connection is severed or all the connected PLC node numbers become disconnected PCWAY considers connection has not been made and enters the connection standby state 2 Perform the disconnection processes with Modem Support and then make the connection again with Modem Support to turn off the informing relay at the PLC and then turn it on again 4 8 3 2 Informing of Errors from the PLC Connection from PLCs Operation If an Error is received The PLC for informing of errors must adhere to the conditions given below e If there is only one remote PLC and it is C NET connection with a C NET adapter then the PLC that dials the phone number must be set to node number 1 e f the COM Port selected for Communication Settings S for Network is the same as the COM Port selected for Communication Settings A for Error Reception If the remote PLC is equipped with a MEWNET H link unit and you also want to access a PLC of the same level with a different node number place a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box This allows access to other PLC node numbers e f the COM Port selected for Communication Settings S for Network is different
217. ll not cut off unless this trigger is turned to OFF or until the time registered below at Limited Time has expired 6 When the line is connected with an ongoing trigger the Limited Time should be specified to prevent the user from forgetting to hang up the line To make this function valid erase the check mark from the None box and register a time in minute units 7 Input the telephone number of the line which you will connect 8 Set at Informing Relay and Informing Event for the relay and event which you will turn to ON after the line has been connected E Modem Support No ere Execute M Yes C NET No 1 Browse W Connection No 1 Browse P Vv 0 Single Trigger V Yes OJo bwWNHO Ongoing Trigger V Yes y o Limited Time M None 0 min Tel No Informing Relay V Notify Informing Event V Notify Comments PageUp U PageDown D 9 Input a simple name for the comment 10 At Node select the PLC node number from the list box which has turned ON the informing relay when PCWAY and the PLC has been line connected It is possible for the PLC to check whether the line has been connected by this relay 11 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to chang
218. ll which are new to the upper No 1 folder 3 Start Operation Preferences of PCWAY and change the work folder to the upper No 1 folder 8 5 Back up Utility Compress and divide the currently selected file so that you can copy this to another floppy disk Operating Procedures 1 Enter the Back up Utility dialog box from the Windows Start menu lolx Eie Edit aa Favorites Tools Help Be Back Qsearch Gyrolders CBristory PF OS X address rew o e a 2 A H ME PCWAY PCWAY Help PCWAYMenu Operation EAS Modem Preferences Connection Location C Program Files PCWAY fi 29 KB E My Computer 2 Double click on the Back up Utility option the following dialog box is displayed Ea PCWAY Backup Utility x Backup Files CellInfo xls Peway ini W_ ddrBook ple W_bitchr ple W_CycSet ple W_Ether ple W_event ple W_FlTrig ple W_fsritr ple WINZO00 ENG Add S gt lt Delete D W_fsrkfl cmt Select All A W_fsrkfl ple W Macro ple MAILDATA PLC BEC oe eet W_Pectel ple W_peunit ple W_PERMITADDR PLC W_relay cmt xl C pcuay Files OK O Cancel iC con Program Files Ple Sample 3 Select your drive See A and folder See B where the data is stored The standard method is to select the work folder at the Operation Preferences dialog box In order to select your type of file either select your t
219. lowing the source station number If other programs run specify the first port number without repetition Station No Enter the node number within the range from 1 to 64 Default value 64 Ensure that the node number is not the same with the destination node number When not using the ET LAN unit the node number is invalid Use Link Unit Station Number Check it V Use LinkUnit Station Number Destination MV Use ET LAN unit IP address 128 1 1 2 Port No 1025 1 32767 Station No 1 1 64 Communication Time out Sec 5 Connection Time out Sec 60 Y Use ET LAN unit If you use our ET LAN Unit you must check in the Check Box IP Address Enter the IP address for destinations which you would like to access Port No Enter the port number within the range from 1 to 32767 Default value 1025 Enter the same IP address and port number as the Ethernet RS232C converter unit marked with A in figure 1 or the ET LAN Unit marked with B in figure 2 in previous page Station No If you use our ET LAN Unit Enter the Unit No of ET LAN Unit Communication Time out Sec After establishing the connection enter the timeout interval every communication within the range from 1 to 950 sec Default value 10 Until establishing the connection this setting is invalid Connection Time out Sec Enter the timeout interval until establishing the connection within the range from 1 to 1
220. lse the changed contents will not be possible to operate Operation Preferences Connection No for the node numbers File Master File Processing File Trigger Event Startup Weekly Timer Interval Timer C NET Settings Auto Macro Startup Sound Startup Modem Support Application Startup Ethernet Remote E mail Setting 2 5 3 Trigger With the PCWAY various types of processing are registered so that they are initiated when a corresponding trigger goes on When working with triggers the following items should be confirmed 1 File Processing When the same trigger has been set for the different No s of File Processing the file processing corresponding to each of the registered number at No will be executed in turn 2 Auto Macro Startup When the same trigger has been set for the different No s of Auto Macro Startup the macros corresponding to each of the registered numbers will be executed in turn 3 Sound Startup When the same trigger has been set for the different No s of Sound Startup each of the sounds corresponding to the registered number will be played in turn This will be repeated over and over 4 Event Startup When the same trigger has been set for the different No s at Event Startup the registered event corresponding to each of the registered numbers will be turned to ON in turn 5 Application Startup When the same trigger has been set
221. ly connected node number Sub PCWAYsubMyAppSetUnitState e Function for obtaining PCWAY execution folder Function PCWAYfncExecDirectory as String Return value Execution folder Example Dim strFolder as String strFolder Application Run PCWAYfncExecDirectory e Function for obtaining PCWAY work folder Function PCWAYfncWorkDirectory as String Return value Work folder Example Dim strFolder as String strFolder Application Run PCWAYfncWorkDirectory e Obtains sheet protection password Function PCWAYfncGetProtect as String Return value Password Example Dim strPassword as String strPassword Application Run PCWAYfncGetProtect Supplement example This is the example of the removing of the sheet protection of the sheet for example Sheett1 After the above function is inputted the following function is inputted Worksheets Sheet1 UnProtect StrPassword The next is the example of the protecting of the sheet once again After the above function is inputted the following function is inputted Worksheets Sheet1 Protect StrPassword e Changing the interval timer settings temporally Function PCWAYfncSetintervalChange Argument 1 as Integer Argument 2 as Integer Argument 3 as Integer as Integer Argumenti Interval Timer No 1 to 100 Argument2 Execution flag 0 End 1 Execute Argument3 Interval time every seconds Return value 0 Normal 1 Interval timer no and specified error of folder to be executed 2
222. m Files PCWAY A tool bar like that shown below is displayed EJ Microsoft Excel Book1 File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Aloo e so gs sm L e CEF 1 Utility for the changing of the node number By clicking the S icon the following dialog box will be displayed It is possible to change the node number of the cell information which has been registered at this dialogbox hange Area All Cells in Active Sheet Cells in Selected Area PLC No before Changing anything PLC No after Changing fo 7 Cancel Nore 1 When you have registered FF broadcast address at PLC No after the changing only the cell registered under WRITE Only is valid 2 This is not valid with the file data or the event 2 Saves in the CVS format the content of the Cell Settings of the Active Sheet By clicking the icon the cell information of the active sheet will be out putted to the CSV file The folder which will be out putted is the book which is currently saved and the file name which is out putted is the active sheet name CSV J s NoTe Carrying out this processing on a newly created book a book that has never been saved creates a CSV file in the root directory Before carrying out this processing first save the book If the CSV file that has been created is opened in Microsoft Excel a document is produced To view this document refer to the
223. mark at Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C Eg wore e When PCWAY is connecting to the CPU port of PLC PCWAY can connect only Unit No 0 e When using FP10S only the tool port can be adopted for use m Concerning the function which enables the informing of PCWAY errors using the modem Error Reception function it is possible to use these networks introduced above together However when PCWAY is connected to the PLC s through C NET RS232C you must set the communication port to another port For further details refer to 3 7 Error Reception 3 2 When Connected by MEWNET H m It is necessary to attach MEWNET H link board independently sold to the computer Including the computer which has MEWNET H Link Board attached to it the overall number of connectable nodes are 64 nodes with 2 computers the number of the PLC is up to 62 sets However only PLCs at the same level as the computer only will be perceived In other words PLCs positioned at different levels will not be perceived In such cases the MEWNET H Link Software independently sold will become necessary for use m When you would like to start the internal processing of PCWAY when the PLC turns on the connections such as the file processing or the auto macro startup and the sound playing itis necessary to set the relaylink M using the MEWNET H setting software For the PLC relay the internal relay R and the relay link L can
224. ment when file data is full 1 a 3 i name e 6 7 Continue processing Set the event to turn on when full v no 8 Specify field type 9 i x etnodl only specified Digits after decimal point uo x 11 Comment a None None Nome Item Explanations 1 File No Possible to register from 1 to 600 When there is a comment the comment will be displayed after the It adds before No after saving the data of File Master 2 Comment Input the comment up to 16 characters 3 File name Input the name of the file which you will create If only the file name has been inputted TEST etc then the file will be created under Work Folder which has been specified at Operation Preferences on the occasion when the file processing has been executed When the file name is input using the full path C My Documents TEST etc the file is created under the specified folder 4 Record quantity Set the quantity of records which you will use ranging from 1 to 30 000 records 5 Write mode Select how to write in data in to the file Insert at beginning of file Writes in the newest data at the most beginning of the file Insert at end of file Writes in the newest data at the very end of the file 6 Display renewal event Set the event number in order to re display the File Data 7 Treatment when file data is full Select whether to continue processing or not when the file data numb
225. mmand It can be connected to the equipment that does not support the monitoring command For using this function select Settings Option of Operation Preferences and check the check box of Monitoring command of MEWTOCOL is not used e Monitoring when a password is omitted by the sheet protection function of Microsoft Excel When a password is omitted by the sheet protection function of Microsoft Excel the obtained data is displayed as well as a normal sheet e Provides up to the COM15 as usable COM ports for the PCWAYLogger For each function of PCWAYLogger usable COM ports are provided up to the COM15 as well as the PCWAY e In the PCWAYLogger funciton the same COM port as the PCWAY can be used without changing the COM port setting When uploading downloading the PCWAYLogger the COM port that is being used by the PCWAY can be automatically used by specifying 1 for the COM port Use the following function to get only the COM port being used by the PCWAY Function name PCWAYLoggerfncGetComNo Return value COM port number being used by the PCWAY For the details of the PCWAY Logger function that is available in this function refer to 8 6 PCWAY Logger e Supports to hide the bar graph message to be displayed during execution of PCWYLogger function The function has been added which hides the bar graph message to be displayed when uploading downloading the PCWAYLogger For the details of the PCWAY Logger function that is avai
226. n ON Operation and OFF Operation Level Operation It is possible to reverse the current status of the specified relay ON will change to OFF OFF will change to ON Pulse Operation This supplies a positive logic pulse to the specified relay After the relay goes on it goes off for a specified period of time the default value is 500 ms The time period that the relay goes from on to off can be set using Operation Preferences ON operation This will turn to ON regardless of the current status of the specified relay OFF operation This will turn to OFF regardless of the current status of the specified relay 5 Character Change No Set the number of the Character Change No If you cannot recall the number by left clicking the Character chenge button the registering window will be displayed Select the desired number and finish 5 1 1 2 Register faaet Attribute Relay C Read Only Register File Data Event C Connection art Connection Settings Sony 1 Node No fi 2 gt Device Code or Data Register 3 Device No jo 4 Display Method num Numeric Value 7 5 No of Words fi x 6 Operation Formula No None RA Operation Formula 7 Input Range min max IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 Node No Select the node number from 0 to 254 J s NoTe If you have specified this attribute as Write Only it is possible
227. n the data has surpassed the specified number for the record Treatment when file data is full 1 4 continue processing x Set the event to turn on when full No x 2 Left click within Continue processing and select either the Continue processing or the Stop processing option Set the event which you will turn ON when the file data is full When you would like to use another processing with this when the records of the file data has reached the specified record number set the event number which will be the trigger device for the other processings Set the event and turn this to ON NOTE When the upper Continue processing has been selected concerning the event which you would like to turn ON whenever the file data has become full after the occasion when it has once been full this will turn to ON e Specify field type The settings for each of the fields Specify field type Method oniy specified Digits after decimal point No 2 Select the field type at Type Left click within Type and select Next select the method of specification for this Left click within method and select either Only specified or All after specified field option Digit after decimal point Select the digit after the decimal point This selection will be applicable when the real number type character has been selected at Type 3 When the 1 and 2 settings has been completed do the s
228. nd WRITE 2 LD Link register Possible to Read and WRITE 3 FL File register Possible to Read and WRITE 4 SV Setting value of the timer counter Possible to Read and WRITE 5 EV Elapsed value of the timer counter Possible to Read and WRITE 6 dt Special data register Only possible to READ 7 m Data link area This is the memory area which is valid only when the network type is MEWNET H Only possible to READ e When using the MEWNET H link board Recognizes starting from m0 according to the range of the data link area which has been set with the MEWNET H Setting Software independently sold e When using the C NET RS 232C network type This is not possible to use e When using the modem network type This is not possible to use 8 WR Internal Relay Possible to Read and WRITE 9 WX External Input Only possible to READ 10 WY External Output Possible to Read and WRITE 11 WL Link Relay Possible to Read and WRITE 12 Other memory areas The index registers are not possible to use with PCWAY Summary Relay READ WRITE DT Data register A A LD Link data register A A FL File register A A SV Setting value of timer and counter A A EV Elapsed value of timer and counter A A dt Special data register A A m Data link area A N A WR Internal Relay A A WX External Input A N A WY External Output A A WL Link Relay A A Index register N A N A
229. nd run this Then go from the Operation Preferences menu bar gt Settings and select Option V ON OFF confirmation message box V PCWAY menubar visible V PCWAY toolbar visible Sheet data no refresh mode necessary to compile Use Link unit No when connection by RSZ32C Communication with the setting unit no of the Ethernet connection E Monitoring Command of MEWTOCOL is not used emere mwan At this dialog box place a check mark at both the PCWAY menubar visible and Use PCWAY toolbar visible After saving and finishing Operation Preferences re start Microsoft Excel 2 Configuring PCWAY as Run the PCWAY Operation Preferences and match the communication conditions with the PLC oe Connection No iP P z z Clicking on __Somection mo B displays a screen showing the Connection No list Specify the number to be connected For further information on settings refer to 6 16 Connection No Set the cell information Select the cell on the Microsoft Excel sheet where you would like to display the PLC relay status or the register values There are three ways in setting the information as shown below 1 Select an appropriate cell on the sheet and click the Cell Settings 2 Double click the cell on the sheet where you would like to display the relay status or the register value 3 Select the cell on the sheet and then go from the menu bar to PCWAY gt
230. ndependent to the PLC after the PCWAY internal treatment has completed Summary Trigger Action after the Registration of informing event internal treatment informing relay Relay link M Informing relay turns on Indispensable Turns on after the internal with pulse treatment Event V Event V turns off Not indispensable Turns on after the internal treatment 2 2 Basic operations of PCWAY Here we will introduce general performances which are possible with PCWAY Also the range of the possible performances expands when you use the macro of Microsoft Excel or by using each of the small programs together the initial registering of each program is required first What is possible Saving the PLC data into the file and displaying the data which has been saved into the file 1 Real time display of the PLC memory area at the Microsoft Excel cell 2 Changing the PLC memory area directly from the Microsoft Excel cell 3 4 Other useful functions Real time display of the PLC memory area at the Microsoft Excel cell With PCWAY only the currently displayed active sheet information can be changed The sheet information which has not been displayed will not be updated Contents Function registration that is related The Character and the color which will be displayed on to the cell is changed by the status of the relay and the event ON OFF Character Change The regis
231. nection No dialog box Execute Select whether executing the above destination node numbers or not When executing check this check box to enter the above destination station numbers into Connection No dialog box Destination name Enter the destination name 40 characters enabled Single Trigger When turning on this trigger following set destination PLCs connect to line Then check ON OFF of the relay area and events entered at C NET Settings and execute adopted internal procedure such as file processing auto macro start Later after refreshing all sheet data of Microsoft Excel displayed currently the line is automatically cut off and this trigger is turned off Ongoing Trigger When this trigger turned on following set destination PLCs connect the line connection remains until this trigger is turned off Limited Time When connecting the line with the Usual Trigger enter the connecting time by the minute unit to prevent forgetting to cut off line When the specified time is expired the line is automatically cut to turn off the usual trigger ET LAN Unit Check the check box when communicating with a personal computer via our ET LAN Unit 8 Timeout Communication Enter the timeout interval every communication within the range from 1 to 950 sec default value 10 after established the connection This setting is invalid until establishing the connection Connection Enter the timeout interv
232. ning of file gt Select contents of process Contents of execution PLC gt Collect data to this file File execution startup timing and action afterward Trigger device M Relay link p turns on to start file execution C NET No 2 Reterence Informing relay V Execute After The execution Node 1 z Relay R Io turns on while trigger is on Informing event IV Execute After the execution event vfo Turn on Message during execution iov file processing for production resu Subject Access E message ue rap Fixed char method Formula No Address es EEE EE TE Caa E _ TE Ceep oo oo E ma EE E L E EE LEE I Formula No 1 Register at No 1 in Operation Formula dialog box as the following figure below une X is equivalent to DT1 number of defects fF Operation Formula Fe Compile C Help H 1 Defect rate Comment Defect rate Read 27 x 1DT Write l When all of the registering has been completed go to and select Save from File in the menu bar You have now completed all of the registerings for the file processing If you have PCWAY running the file processing will be executed at the same timing as when the program of PLC has turned LO to ON 4 2 3 Displaying the file data onto the Microsoft Excel sheet Display the file data which you have created onto the Microsoft Excel sheet 1 Select the corner of the cell where you would like to displ
233. nnected area when connecting the lines 3 5 Modem Over 65 Remote Regions m Using a modem PLCs in remote areas up to 4 096 regions can be monitored manually or automatically However when there are 65 or more regional connections automatic patrolling of PLCs is not possible and you cannot change the PLC configurations for each region Settings for the various regions telephone numbers etc must be registered under Modem Connection For information on using Modem Connection please refer to the corresponding Help function When Modem Connection is booted a Help item appears on the menu m Specify the Connection No and C NET Settings parameters shared by all of the remote areas To set up the system so that the internal processing of the PCWAY functions such as file processing auto macro startup and sound startup is booted when the PLCs in the various remote regions connected to the network turn on the relays the C NET Settings of the PCWAY must be used to recognize the various PLC relays as the relay link area M Operating environment settings Boot Operation Preferences and specify the following information c icati Click on the Sees erase button under Network Select MODEM under Network Type Enter the correct settings for the COM Port Baud Rate Data Length Stop Bit and Parity parameters and enter setting for the Timeout and Public Line Timeout parameters
234. nnection by the phone line is made it turns from off to on Also if there are relay links that are turned on and set as trigger events from the relay link area set at C NET Settings they will be executed Afterwards the informing relay is set to off to inform the PLC that connection is severed and the connection is automatically severed 4 8 1 4 Informing of Errors to a Personal Computer from PLCs Different Port The phrase different port means that the port number when MODEM is selected under Network Type on the genni menu item under Network for Operation Preferences in the PCWAY being different from that specified for gutramgs tay under Error Reception Reception is made possible by placing a check in the Receive check box for Error Reception in the Operation Preferences dialog box Communication Click the secen Ai button and perform the required settings at the Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error dialog box that appears ER Operation Preferences TT File F Settings C Help H Communication Setting Operation Preferences Error EG Network type PC Type pRef i COM port Eom Cancel PC Type IBM PC AT Z Dis aud rate 9600 v bps aa ose Rel Initialize Data length Net Type HODEN Fil C 7bits 8bits Help Communication Settings S Mac Stop bit 1 bit f 2bits z Permit the v E connectioniM postal E Hol Non C Odd
235. nnection of the PLC which has been line terminated due to the power turning off Set with each 1 minute within the 1 to 10 minute range 9 Work Folder Specify the folder where the PCWAY registered files or the operation preference is stored Concerning the work folder this does not have to be changed later on since this will be set at the installing stage Menu bar e File Save Updates the setting contents Save and Exit The settings contents are updated and the file is exited Exit Finishes without updating the settings contents e Settings Option The dialog box for PCWAY options can be changed by entering Option O ltem Explanations on Menu bar gt Settings C gt Option O EE Operation Preferences i xj 21 ON OFF confirmation message box 3 gt PCWAY menubar visible 4 9 pcway toolbar visible 5 7 sheet data no refresh mode necessary to compile 6 7 Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C 7 gt I Communication with the setting unit no of the Ethernet connection 8 gt Monitoring Command of MEWTOCOL is not used meno moan _ 1 Double click for cell settings When you would not like to have Cell Settings displayed whenever you double click the Microsoft Excel cell remove the check mark at this check box 2 ON OFF Confirmation Message box When an Microsoft Excel cell is double clicked to turn PLC relays and events on and off while monitoring is in pr
236. nput Edit display color Background color Yes C No Select character color OLEC nn background color EEHEHE When registered at Message 2x Target Attribute ORelay Read Only Register C File Data C Read Write C Event Connection Write Only C Connection Settings Node No 1 M Device Code DT Data Register X Device No 0 Display Method MSG Message Display X Nos of Words oes Fie E Edie Heb IV Next Time Open On Double click Delete Cancel Character input Cell Settings FT Er Attribute C Edit display color Raley Read only Register Select color File Data Pines ReadiWrite Background color Yes No Connection gt Select character color C Connection Settings Evins c BEEBE TT gt Select background color BEEBE TT Node No 1 v Device Code or Data Register Device No o Display Method No of Words Message No I Next Time Open On Double click Cancel Delete 2 When editing 1 Select the number which you would like to edit at No Left click within No and select Next when you would like to change the comment change this directly at Comment When you would like to have the comment displayed right after the No then do this by the following procedure Select a tempo
237. nts of the Sheet Print Out Topic 10 Ladder sample program for ET LAN Unit ETLAN Topic 11 Data downloading with Form button DownLoad Topic 12 Updating other data sheet from this sheet Sheet Update Topic 13 Saving Generation 1 file which is accumulated in the File Save 8 2 PCWAY Manager For those who do not want to have to go through the same procedures of adding in PCWAY in to the Microsoft Excel However the PCWAY manager will always be added in To add in POWAY Manager first click on Add in Registration and Control under Tools on the Microsoft Excel menu bar and then press the Reference button and double click on the PcwayMgr xla file in the folder used to install PCWAY usually this is located under Program Files PCWAY A tool bar like that shown below is displayed EJ Microsoft Excel Book1 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY kan oe 3 2 Oe S ee EE 2 3 4 5 6 zi By clicking the 4 on the left side PCWAY will be added in to the program By clicking the 4 on the right the add in of PCWAY will be removed 8 3 PCWAY Utility The PCWAY add in provides you with optional tools To add in PCWAY Manager first click on Add in Registration and Control under Tools on the Microsoft Excel menu bar and then press the Reference button and double click on the PcwayUty xla file in the folder used to install PCWAY usually this is located under Progra
238. o parameter Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures 1 When the Network Type of Operation Preferences is the Modem select the C NET No which you would like to register Otherwise the displaying is not possible Left click within C NET No and select ey C NET Settings File F Help H No No ir C Yes Node 17 jez 0 From 1 7 Word Mm Next input a comment After inputting a comment when you would like to reflect a comment after the choose another temporary C NET No and return Then the inputted comment will be displayed 2 Next select whether to execute or not the contents which has been set at execute EW C NET Settings File E Help H C NET No Comment Comment an range Relay link range _ Da No C No firr No No 1RO RF EE C No aa e a 3 Input comment 4 Select the node number at Node then select whether you will use WR internal relay or WL relay link area and input the first number which you would like to register as the relay link area Select the number of words which you will register EHIC NET Settings File E Help H C NET No Fi Comment Comment Execute Relay link range ia e a hir Yes Node 1
239. ode in the dialog box displayed by clicking the Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box the Informing Relay is turned off and then on By this relay turning on the PLC can verify the status of the phone line connection Since it is possible that an error could have occurred at the PLC leaving the informing relay on from the last phone line connection it is first turned off and then on again The duration the informing relay is turned off can be set at Relay ON Time for Pulse Width Settings in the Operation Preferences dialog box 7 PLC surveillance First the relay link area set with C NET Settings is checked If a relay link area that is on is set as a trigger the corresponding internal processing file processing etc will be carried out Then the content of currently active Microsoft Excel sheet is updated 4 67 8 Inform PLC of phone line disconnection For the node numbers specified at Node in the dialog box displayed by clicking the Details D button at the Modem Support dialog box the relay specified at Informing Relay is turned off 9 Phone line disconnection Concerning the Error Informing PLC It is important to be aware of the information given below regarding the error informing PLC e Before calling it is necessary to have the RS232C port usage set to Use Serial Data Communication multi purpose port Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming
240. ogress a window titled Change ON OFF State of Relay is displayed Erase this check mark if you prefer that the window not be displayed 3 PCWAY menu bar visible When you would not like to have the PCWAY menu bar displayed over the Microsoft Excel screen then remove the check mark at this check box 4 PCWAY tool bar visible When you would not like to have the PCWAY tool bar displayed over the Microsoft Excel screen then remove the check at this check box 5 Sheet data no refresh mode necessary to compile Place a check mark when you would like to operate based on the compiled sheet information For detailed information 5 16 Compile 6 Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C For instance when you have the CPU of the PLC linked to MEWNET H and connected to PCWAY by RS232C and would desire to access other PLCs situated at the same level place a check mark at this check box Link Unit No 1 Node No 1 Link Unit No 2 Node No 1 Link Unit No 3 Node No 1 From the time when you have performed this setting all accesses to the PLC will be made at the Link Unit No instead of the CPU Node No 6 7 a norte When you did not place a check mark the upper PLC 2 will be recognized as Node No 1 By placing a check mark 2 of the upper figure which is directly connected to the computer only will be recognized as Node No 0 regardless of the Link Unit No If a check mark is placed here and the PLC is
241. ok will be erased And it is preserved with the HTML form The file name will be saved in the folder of which the corresponding book has been opened When the corresponding book is that of what has been just newly created this will be saved in to the PCWAY work folder After the book has been saved into the PCWAY work folder the performances will be done automatically until the former book is redisplayed It is possible to start the HTML file saving by one of the method below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Save HTML File L e Click ja e Shortcut key Ctrl M eNote When files and folders have already been saved as HTML they are overwritten to save This function works on Microsoft Excel 2000 or higher 5 16 Compile Start the compiling by the following e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Compile M Before beginning to explain about Compile we would like to first give some explanations of PCWAY With PCWAY if you update an active sheet during the running of the monitor PCWAY will perform the followings 1 Writes the cell information of an active sheet into the work file 2 Communicates with the PLC based on the contents of the work file When you have set many cell information at the sheet the upper no 1 performance will be rather slow This depends of course on the personal computer type which is in use Note that with 8000 cells it will take 40seconds When you would lik
242. ok1 ffia Fie Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat E SRAlspe eme IEE Bi e If you prioritize pasting in the rightwards direction Choose a primary cell selected as the original for copying Go to PCWAY gt Copy Cell Settings C E File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help PCWAY Acrobat S ealsoee Fe ge It is possible to select more than one cell for copying Go to PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A gt To the Right R Specify the cell range where you will perform the copying to and go to PCWAY gt Paste Cell Settings V With this the copying will be performed in the rightwards direction when the pasting in the rightwards direction has reached the very end then the pasting will next proceed to the cell on the very left side of the following row J s NoTe If the copy source cell is contained within the same cell range as the copy destination cell the device number is not incremented by 1 the first time that copying is carried out but is incremented by 1 each time that copying is carried out after that If the copy source cell is not contained within the same cell range as the copy destination cell the device number is incremented by 1 starting from the first time that copying is carried out 5 5 Set Cell Order Perform the cell operation settings by one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY g
243. on file 1 gt copied to 2nd generation file 2 Copies the 1st generation file newly created to the 2nd generation file The first generation file will remain as it is e 1st generation file 1 gt moved to 3rd generation file 3 Transfers the first generation file newly created to the 3rd generation file The first generation file will be deleted e 1st generation file 1 gt copied to 3rd generation file 3 Copies the first generation file newly created to the 3rd generation file The first generation file will remain as it is e 2nd generation file 2 gt moved to 3rd generation file 3 Transfers the 2nd generation file newly created to the 3rd generation file The 2nd generation file will be deleted e 2nd generation file 2 gt copied to 3rd generation file 3 Copies the 2nd generation file newly created to the 3rd generation file The 2nd generation file will remain as it is e Initialize 1st generation Initializes the 1st generation file after the file has been created The 1st generation file will be deleted e Initialize 2nd generation Initializes the 2nd generation file after the file has been created The 2nd generation file will be deleted e Initialize 3rd generation Initializes the 3rd generation file after the file has been created The 3rd generation file will be deleted 6 Trigger device Set the device for starting the file processing M Relay link
244. on for displaying the connection status with PLC 5 9 5 1 1 6 Connection Settings 2x rTarget r ttribute Relay Read Only Register C F File Data C Read Write C Event C ci C Write Only 1 ode No fi E 2 character Change No fi Character Change IV Next Time Open On Double click OK Cancel Delete 1 Node No Select the node number from 0 to 254 2 Character Change No Set the number for Character Change When you do not know the corresponding number by left clicking the Character chenge button the registering dialog box for this will be displayed Select the number which you will use and finish 5 2 Delete Cell Settings It is possible to delete the cell information with one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Delete Cell Settings X e Click Delete the cell information of the specified area If the data is that of what has been just deleted the contents of one cell in all will be memorized By selecting Paste Cell Settings amp it is possible to move to the specified cursor position 5 3 Copy Cell Settings It is possible to copy the cell information by one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Copy Cell Settings C e Click Write the specified cell on to the clipboard Then by selecting the Paste Cell Settings amp this will be copied to the specified position and the device number and t
245. one gt Reference Filename Record quantity Write node Choose a file which has been set at File Master Either left click File No or go to the File Master dialog box entering this with the Reference command button and go to File gt Select current No and finish By doing so the file number will be specified and will return to the File processing dialog box 1 e Select contents of process Select the processing method for the file Select contents of process Contents of execution PLC gt Collect data to this file x Select the processing method for the file which has been specified Left click Contents of execution and choose how to do the processing e File execution startup timing and actions afterward Specifications for the file trigger File execution startup timing and action afterward 1 Trigger device M Relay link gt o turns on to start file execution _ 2 3 t Informing relay Y Execute After The execution Node 15 Relay R o turns on while trigger is on Informing event IV Execute After the execution event vfo Turn on 5 Hitessage during execution 1 Do the settings of when starting the file processing Left click Trigger device and select Then input the relay link number or the event number 2 Itis possible to specify C NET No if the Network Type has been specified as Modem at the Operation preferences dialog box With the Reference
246. onto the Microsoft Excel sheet 4 22 4 3 Booting Microsoft Excel Macros Automatically ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 25 43T WhatsiS a MaC O Z a hands fe cet eae d a a aaa a aaa e a dee eaea aaa daaa aianei 4 25 4 3 2 Creating the Macro eee is erinin danisir iani Aan AEAEE NEE aei 4 25 4 3 3 Register the macro which will start automatically ceeeeeeeeeee 4 33 4 4 Turn on the Relay Event at a Specified Time or at a Certain Interval 4 34 4 4 1 Turn the Relay and Event to On at the Specified Time of the Specified Day OT the Week a er adel oc leeea lena dace aiea ane d a det cet aaee ded aed 4 34 4 4 2 Turn the Relay and Event to On at a Certain Interval eee 4 35 4 5 Playing the SOUNG taisicsssehe te teee ssc eebs veeevehe send vaed pagans gaetvehd goed sabesiedeebesaeteteaets 4 36 4 5 1 Procedures of the sound PlayiNg eeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeee ae eeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeae eee 4 36 4 5 2 Create the WAV file 2 0 0 0 cece cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeavaeaeeeeegeensnenenas 4 36 4 5 3 Register at Sound Startup 00 eee eee eee eee eeeeea eee aa eeeeaaeeeeae ee eee 4 36 4 6 Turn On the Event by the Changing of the Relay Information of the PLC 4 37 4 6 1 Watch the changing of the relay eee eee eeeeeeeeee etna rete aa eeee ae ee eee 4 37 4 6 2 Have PCWAY recognize the relay which will be watched as the link Ee deere eer E E E ener rer etree Tree terrier cree
247. ory 512 Mb Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel 2000 PLC FP2SH J eNote The comparison above is used as reference Therefore the aforementioned processing time is not necessarily guaranteed The processing time may vary depending on a use environment When a large amount of cell information setting is assigned for one book in Microsoft Excel the processing speed largely differs from the one shown above because memory consumption is large 7 5 5 AND and OR with calculation functions e Operators amp amp and in the previous version are processed as amp amp AND and OR in Ver 2 5 respectively For this operation bit values of WR WX WY and WL devices in file processing can be obtained Example of obtaining bit values When obtaining the 4 bit R1004 of WR100 at Station No 1 Example of entering an operation expression Read item X amp amp 16 16 Results 0 R1004 is OFF 1 R1004 is ON 7 5 6 Saving Microsoft Excel books as HTML e Active books can be saved as HTML by selecting one from the following three options 1 HTML File Save icon on the PCWAY tool bar 2 POWAY menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl M Microsoft Excel books can also be saved as HTML by calling from the user created macro in Auto Macro Startup Built in macros File name automatically saving process Sub PCWAYsubHTMLFileSave File name designation saving process Function PCWAYfncHTMLFileSaveNameTy
248. osoft Excel Macro Use PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry when you want to use PCWAYsubDoubleClick Ex Operating ON OFF the relay of Microsoft Excel Cell B2 Range B2 Select Call Application Run PCWAYsubDoubleClickEntry 7 4 API Function for Event V Access This section describes the API functions used to obtain and convert the on off status of events V being managed internally in the PCWAY with other applications created with VC and VB 7 4 1 Obtaining the Status of the Specified Event Number VC Function PCWAYapiEventRead e Function Obtain the status of the specified event number e Construction short FAR PASCAL PCWAYapiEventRead char pcEventString e Parameter pcEventString Specifies the character string of the event number ending with NULL e Return value When the event turns on 1 is returned and when it turns off 0 is returned If an event number that does not exist is specified for the argument 1 is returned e Explanation Reads the status of event 19E V19E Short sResult Sresult PCWAYapiEventRead 9E Reads status of V19E if 1 sResult MessageBox NULL V19E is on EVENT MB_Ok else if 0 sResult MessageBox NULL V19E is off EVENT MB_OkK else An error results if the return value is anything other than 1 or 0 MessageBox NULL The event number specified at the argument is invalid EVENT MB_Ok e Applicable information
249. ou have chosen OFF Operation with the operation method of Cell Settings Not relating by the value of the cell the corresponding relay turns to OFF after the downloading 5 12 Update All Sheet Data With PCWAY only the currently active sheet can update continuously the displaying of the PLC information and the file data which has been entered in to the Microsoft Excel cell There will be no changes with information if the sheet is currently not active Therefore when wishing to save the contents of a current book for instance it will be necessary to update all sheet information including that of sheets which are not active It is possible to update all of the sheet information by one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Update All Sheet Data W e Click e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift H a eNore e Update All Sheet Data is unselectable unless PCWAY has been already started e With Update All Sheet Data the displaying of the PLC relay and register information or the event information the file data and the communication conditions etc will be updated Tasks such as changing the color of the chart which is displayed on to the Microsoft Excel sheet using the macro is not possible to perform here 5 13 Update Active Sheet Data Use Update Active Sheet Data when you would like to update only the sheet information of a currently active sheet for 5 12 Update All Sheet Data e
250. pe_ Argument 1 As String Argument 2 As Integer As String Argument 1 File name to be saved An extension is not included Argument 2 0 Original book is saved 1 Original book is not saved When Argument 1 is set but Argument 2 is not set the case 0 above is applied Return value Saved HTML file name with full path What to be careful of when saving the HTML format 1 When there happens to exist a several number of sheets in a book it is necessary to do the settings at Update All Sheet Data before saving the book K Either click the of Update All Sheet Data or go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Update All Sheet Data 2 For a file name saved in File name automatically saving process above the extension htm is added to the target book name and the file is created in the same folder as the target file At this time the target book is also overwritten To specify file names and folders use File name designation saving process above When files and folders have already been saved as HTML automatically they are overwritten to save When a book is newly created xls and htm files are saved in PCWAY work folder nn Pee 7 5 7 Enable Disable selection for the connecting station No during PCWAY monitoring e PLC connection can be temporarily disabled when power is shut down during monitoring or there are no PLCs which need monitoring The disabled connection
251. peration formula is input R EXAMPLE X 100 X 100 Ef Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H Comment Sample Read x 100 Write 4 Next if any kind of operation processing is to be carried out on the value being written and the data is to be processed enter the operation formula in the Write column The value to be written the value input to the cell should be indicated by X upper case half width when the operation formula is input Ya EXAMPLE X 100 X 100 E Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H Comment Samp 1e Read x 100 Write e7100 Fi 5 When all of the inputting has been completed perform compile Go to the menu bar of Operation Formula gt Compile C gt Run X E Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H Error List D No Comment Samp 12 Read e 100 Write e7100 1 Sample When Successfully completed is displayed go to File gt Save gt Exit or to Select current No and finish and the registering procedures will be completed However Select current No and finish is selectable only when you have registered from Operation Formula of Cell Settings The currently displayed number will be next displayed at Operation Formula No of Cell Settings Operation Formula File E Compile C Help H 5 J Export Save and Exit E Read x 100 Write e7100 When you
252. playing performances for the file data could be affected 2 5 5 Macro name The macro name PCWAY is used at the system of PCWAY Please avoid using the macro name which starts with PCWAY and including the special characters when creating the macro program You don t add after your Microsoft Excel Macro Name when you input your Microsoft Excel Macro in Auto Macro Startup Ya EXAMPLE Macro Name Sub TEST gt TEST 2 5 6 Special data register The special data register starts from either the 9000th PLC set or the 90000th set according to the PLC type Therefore it is necessary with PCWAY to specify at the offset of each of the starting numbers PLC type Special data register Reserved in PCWAY FP e FPO FP1 FP M FP3 FP C DT9000 DT9255 dt0 dt255 FP5 FP10 FP10 FP10S FP FP2 FP2SH FP10SH DT90000 DT90255 dt0 dt255 2 5 7 About the file name of Microsoft Excel Do not use the special characters for the file name PCWAY will not operate correctly if these are used 2 17 2 5 8 Application Startup 1 Applications cannot be booted by specifying a data file related to an application in the column for the name of the application to be executed For example Notepad cannot be booted by specifying TEST TXT a text file in the application name column Torun an application as described above specify the application name as Notepad and then set TEST TXT as
253. port button and then AIl Settings to set the Read Register File E Settings C Help H PC Type PC Type Network Net Type MODEM Communication Settings 3 IV Receive Permit the connection M File E Help H m Error Reception Number of regions Over 65 Regions Modem Support 0 r Pulse Width Settings l 00msec Relay ON Time IF Modem Support mas a 4 ty t nr Work CC _ Set All Trigger y g L Yes RO vo ass Interrupt Trigger v o T Yes i san seccinga ta Terminate Trigger v o J Yes Read Register DT o No of Retries 0 Times Resend Wait Time Next Connection Time 90 See 90 999 90 Sec 0 999 With this Read Register the first 3 words of the PLC data are read PCWAY reads the PLC with Refresh Interval Settings aici Data 1 O0msec IE Modem Support x C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Event Comments OOOo0o0 ann bon the node number 1 for the Read Register However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word The Mo
254. r is up to 100 numbers In order to delete a number which you have registered go to the menu bar to Edit E gt Delete Message No D By selecting this option the last registered number is deleted ile E Edit E Help H Character input C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color BEEE Select background color BESEeT Next input a comment if desired After a comment has been input to display the comment immediately after the colon simply select another comment and then go back to the original one The input comment is displayed in the No comment column after the colon Comments can also be displayed by selecting File on the menu bar and saving the data File E Edit E Help H No 1 Machine Condition jea Comment fitachine Condition C Character input Edit display color Select color Select character color EHEHEH gt Select background color SSS HEHEHHE 2 Input the character at Message By left clicking within Message where you would like to input the Data value the area will be highlighted and the character will be imputable At this point the character color and the background color will not yet be displayed if Message File F Edit E Help H No 1 Machine Condition Comment ftachine Condition I Character inp
255. r more PLCs are connected place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box P Operation Preferences X C Program Files PCWAY Click the _ovee 65 nesions to button that appears and set the Read Register Informing Relay and other settings F Operation Preferences You cannot change the PLC configuration for each region The PLC configuration is shared by all regions The Informing Relay is on for only the PLC with the node number 1 4 44 4 8 1 1 Connecting to PLCs from a Personal Computer When there are less than 65 PLCs connected The PLC configuration can be set for each region using Modem Support When the events set in Modem Support turn on ongoing connection rotating connection and the like are possible You can also set the informing relay for informing the PLCs when connections are made More than one node number can be set It is also possible for informing to the informing event When there are 65 or more PLCs connected The PLC configuration is shared by all regions To connect start up Modem Connection and connect manually For more information regarding settings refer to the Help supplied with Modem Connection The Help is viewed by starting up Modem Connection and choosing Help from the menu To perform the setup for 65 or more connections place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions
256. rary different number and then return to the former area The changed comment will be displayed after No after the Otherwise perform the saving procedures of menu bar gt File Defects Demonstration Elevator Character input C Edit display color Select color Background color C Yes No Select character color EEE eT TT Select background color EHHE 2 Perform the editing of Message When you would like to edit the character only By selecting Character input and clicking the message edit box under Message the edit box will be highlighted in white and the character will turn to black With this the characters can be inputted Now re input the character After you have changed the character by this process this display color of the character will remain as it is and the character only will be changed File F Edit E Help H No j 1 Machine Condition z Comment Machine Condition Data value Message offre Character impure C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color CL ie eee E background color When editing the display color only Select Edit display color first and then select the character color and the background color or specify directly the color at Select character color or Select background color When the disp
257. ration Preference dialog box is displayed Communication For select Ethernet Remote from network types click Beal button under Network to open the Network dialog box Select Ethernet Remote from Net Type File E Settings C Help H m PC Type PC Type C NET RS232C Network MODEM Net Type Ethernet Remote i MEWNET H No Connection J Acquire IP address automatically Cancel Pulse Width Settings Computer IP address te di Te AG Help Relay ON Time Work Folder c Program F Detail Each item for connection must be entered in Ethernet Remote dialog box Ethernet Remote M With clicking Ethernet Remote dialog box is displayed For the network type other than Ethernet Remote the PLC node number you wish to connect should be entered using the Connection No dialog box For Ethernet Remote however Connect No is not necessary to be set For the PLC node number you wish to connect in Ethernet Remote enter the number in the Destination St No and place a check mark in the Execute Yes check box e Detail PCWAY displays the following dialog when you click Dei button The connection doesn t receive an influence of other connection by this setting If time is required to the connection of other PLC other connection does not influence Ethernet Detail Settings x I Communication Module is started every PLC unit The
258. relay R10 Preconditions Internal relay It is necessary to have PCWAY recognize RO as the relay link MO For MEWNET H Use the MEWNET H setting software Sold separately For MEWNET P System register setting is required For C NET or the Modem Refer to 6 11 C NET Settings Program for the PLC XO R10 RO HDF HH RO When X0 turns ON RO will be self held PCWAY settings lt E mail Setting gt Trigger Device MO Informing relay R10 For the settings other than Trigger Device and Informing relay enter the settings for the data you wish to send For details concerning E mail Setting refer to 6 18 E mail Setting 4 9 3 Sending Equipment Status Information Periodically to the PC and the Cellular Phone via E mail Equipment status information can be sent to the PC and the cellular phone via e mail at the specified day and time or at specified intervals e Specifying the day and time E mails are sent to the PC and the cellular phone at 18 00 on Fridays PCWAY settings lt Weekly Timer gt Specified Time 18 00 Specified Day Friday Device V100 For details concerning Weekly Timer refer to 6 9 Weekly Timer lt E mail Setting gt Trigger Device V100 For the settings other than Trigger Device enter the settings for the data you wish to send For details concerning E mail Setting refer to 6 18 E mail Setting e Specifying the intervals E mails are sent to the PC and the cellular phone at interv
259. rere reree pe reer cree 4 37 4 6 3 Perform the event Startup cece ee etter ee ee tena ee ee ener etna ee eeaaeeeeaeeeeees 4 38 4 7 Managing the Filep pssi ve ce cox ceeed cei dedi rurita deed vedy coxa vety cevaveey coxa teed Erva Tin kan 4 39 4 7 1 Manage the file with the generation of the accumulating file 4 39 4 7 2 Controlling Files Using the Microsoft Excel Book Log eccess 4 40 4 7 3 Saving Microsoft Excel books as HTML cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 41 4 8 Using the Public Phone Line 00 aie wkGad eek enka aha eauee is 4 42 4 8 1 The Difference between Less than 65 and 65 or More Remote Locations e een genes tecececeere cicheqaeatac rere eGA 4 42 4 8 2 When Thereare Less Than 65 Remote Regions ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 57 4 8 3 When There are More than 65 Remote Regions eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 71 4 9 USING the Email FUNTON irinenn a ea neea eea 4 84 49 1 OVENVIEW Araian inaia ane a n e a Ae E ra Aa A aa Oa a AER ECS 4 84 4 9 2 Sending the Error Status Information to the PC and the Cellular Phone via AnA EE 1 EEPE E EE EE A 4 85 4 9 3 Sending Equipment Status Information Periodically to the PC and the Cellular Phone via E mail 0 ccc ceecceeeeee seen ee eeeeceeeeceeeesaeeeeeaaeeenaaeees 4 86 4 9 4 Inquiry on the Equipment Status from the PC and the Cellular Phone P PEE EEE RTE E E ENEE TET 4 87 5 Operations From the PCWAY Menubar sssceeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 1
260. rigger make sure to set Informing Relay Gy Auto Macro Startup xj No I 1 Execute V Yes Trigger E o IV Wority Informing Relay Node fa v Relg in Informing Event M Notify v Macro Name No 1 Execute M iesi Trigger i 7 0 Informing Relay M Wority Node 1 gt Relay iB 0 3 m Informing Event M Nogi Macro Name PageUp U PageDown D Help H 6 To exit this screen when all of the settings have been entered click on the Exit button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 13 Sound Startup e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Sound Startup S e Click oe EE Sound Startup Joano U NES Item Explanations 1 Execute Select whether to execute the selected number or not Trigger Set the device which will start the execution C NET No This will be displayed only when the Network Type of Operation Preferences is Modem Do the settings of C NET No which have been set at C NET Settings After clicking the Browse command button the C NET Settings window will be displayed With this by going to File gt Select current No and finish it is also possible to select from here Concerning on the registering details 6 11 C NET Settin
261. rminate Trigger When there are a several Single Trigger under Details which are on at the same time and when the event number registered here turns on all of the Single Trigger which have not been executed yet will be turned off After this the Terminate Trigger will turn off automatically Read Register Register the data register for reading the PLC information for the occasion of an error reception when the line has been connected from the PLC to PCWAY Starting from the specified data register 2 words will be read Store the values noted below on the PLC side 1st word Store the number for registering of Modem Support by decimal Example when the registered number is 5 then K 5 2nd word Store the event number which you would like to turn ON after the line has been connected by hexadecimal When there is no need to turn on the event store FFFF H FFFF by hexadecimal Example when the event No is 2F then H 2F No of Retries Set how many times you would like to retry connecting the line when a call attempt has failed due to a faulty connection Set within the 0 to 9 times range Resend Wait Time Set the waiting time until the line is reconnected after the line has failed to be connected Set within the 90 to 999sec range 7 Next Connection Time If the Single Trigger parameter under Details has been set to on simultaneously for numerous times specify the time period that the system is
262. rrrrreerrsrrerreene 3 8 3 5 Modem Over 65 Remote Regions s ssssssesssesrresrrrrerrrsrrrersrrrerrrerrerere 3 15 3 6 Not CONNEC eoar e ee tees EA Ea EA beg edewecans tee ERER ceemenen ed 3 16 C E AKO LRL AOA AeA EA ALEEA EEEE EAEE EEEE EAE AE AEEA 3 17 3 8 Ethernet Local Remote Connection s sssssssrsssrrssrrrersrrrerrrrerrrerrreererere 3 21 3 8 1 Ethernet LOCal aaae ae aaa eea manaa aaa aanraai ea a aeaa n aa ea tate 3 22 3 8 2 Ethernet Remote ccecece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeesaeeaeeeaaes 3 24 3 9 USB GT32 GT05 Connechonics sb0ecoGeceue ete ese aie ass 3 25 4 Basic Operations Of POWAY 0 cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 1 Displaying and Operating PLC Data Information with Microsoft Excel 4 2 4 1 1 Outline of the Basic Procedures eceeceececeeeee nee ee ee eeee aa eeeeaaeeeeaeeeeee 4 2 4 1 2 Setting the cell information 0 0 eee ee nee e entree eae e etna rete aa eeee ne ee eee 4 5 4 1 3 Copying and pasting the cell information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 11 4 1 4 How to operate during the running of the monitoring eee 4 12 4 2 Saving PLC Information into the File ccceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeae tessa eeeeaeees 4 16 MON o VS TGs teatro sntuny E hi dddacheudseuch denenan T 4 16 4 2 2 Create a file and execute the processing cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 4 19 4 2 3 Displaying the file data
263. rs the PCWAY so that data is held autonomously The relay that discontinues this self hold of the data is called an information relay here it is RO with the POWAY When LO goes on the PCWAY stores the number of production and other information in a file and then the PCWAY turns on RO A program is required so that this RO discontinues the self hold circuit and resets the number of production and number of defects to 0 After confirming that LO has gone off the PCWAY turns RO off Preparations for PCWAY When connected by C NET RS232C in order to use LO as trigger MO the settings at C NET Settings is necessary For further information on the setting procedures refer to 6 11 C NET Settings Creating the file In order to create the file first you must set at File Master the saving numbers record numbers each of the field types data items and the writing mode etc For further information on each of the items and registering methods refer to 6 5 File Master Run File Master and register the following settings as file no 1 ig File Master xj File E Edit E Help H File base setting File No 1 Production File Comment Production File File name test a Record quantity 100 Write node Insert at end of file gt Display renewal event V No Treatment when file data is full continue processing Set the event to turn on when full No Specify field type TypefReal n
264. s PLC station No PCWAY LOGGER can not read gt e When PCWAY and PCWAY LOGGER use different port each other It is necessary for you to set the communication condition by using PCWAYLoggerfncShowParamSetDlg function If you execute Macro ShowParamSet which is in LoggerSample xis file the following dialog is appeared Then you can set the communication condition LoggerSample xls is usually located under Program Files PCWAY xl Network type COM port Baud rate 19200 Y bps Data length C 7bis 8bits Cancel iE Initialize Stop bt 1 bit C 2bits r Parity Non Odd Even Time out 5 X sec Parameter for automatic setting MV Baud rate IV Data Length IV Parity e When PCWAY use Ethernet Remote and PCWAY LOGGER use Ethernet PCWAY LOGGER has to set Ethernet Local by using PCWAYLoggerfncShowParamSetDlg function When PCWAY LOGEER uses the same connection to PCWAY please set the same registration of POWAY When PCWAY LOGEER uses the different connection from PCWAY please set the different registration J s NoTe PCWAY LOGGER connect PLC only during uploading or downloading When those operations is completed the connection is cut off 8 7 o Operable No guarantee of proper operation Not supported Compatibility Between Each OS and Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel products Windows 7 Windows Vista 1
265. s bia ait abe AE dees gaa Geena Cheah eee EET 2 14 2 5 1 Operation Preferences 0 2 eceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceneeecaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeesaaeeenaa ees 2 14 2 5 2 Operations of POWAY sieisen ee aaa a yedd ooh deaubieckcbes ses dea 2 15 275 3 TOG Clisctvie elec secede heneeee aden eevee beans Hh nee aed aR ee Laden 2 16 2 94 GIIPDO ANC REEE dle hence acuiuies dads anPaNbuhtiss date v ache ar ladda 2 17 215 5 Macro names ee aaae ees dint EAE ep TAEAE aus TE e deters ect 2 17 2 5 6 Special data register sssssssssersserrrnerrrnnrrrenttrrnttrnttantrnnreantrnntnnennne 2 17 2 5 7 About the file name of Microsoft Excel ssssseserreerirerrrrrrrrerrreeren 2 17 2 5 8 Application Startup 0 cece cece eeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaa ees 2 18 2 5 9 Export function of Each Registering Module eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 2 5 10 When you make the macro of the Microsoft Excel esscr 2 18 2 5214 OUMGIS sect ecto Sates deg stevie sede vegees an ead edigied E oeed usb seee etek 2 18 3 Overview HARDWARE 0 cecceceeeececceceneeneecenceceeceneeeeeseneaes 3 1 3 1 Overview on Hardware iireiccs recs casivees dais ceudecivevs de civevededssneedeiteaeece iereeca denne eee 3 2 3 2 When Connected by MEWNET H sececeseeeceneeeceneeecaueeecaaesenaeeenaaees 3 3 3 9 GsNET RS232 C6 ConnetilOfisssscusunanununu anun ana ai 3 5 3 4 Modem Up To 64 Remote Regions essssssessssssrssrrerrerrsrrsrie
266. s node number 1 e By placing a check mark only No 2 of above which is connected directly with the computer will be perceived as node number 0 self node regardless of the node number of the link unit e If you attempt accessing to the PLC after placing a check mark this mode will not be canceled until the PLC is switched to OFF This can be canceled however the CPU of the PLC will memorize this In order to cancel this it is necessary to turn off the switch of the No 2 PLC e When using FP10S only the tool port can be adopted for your use errr ener eee eee ee 3 7 3 4 Modem Up To 64 Remote Regions Amodemcam be used to monitor PLCs in remote regions up to 64 regions either manually or automatically Also the PLC configuration can be changed in region units If connections include 65 or more regions automatic patrolling of PLCs is not possible and the PLC configuration cannot be changed in region units It is necessary to set the settings for all of the regions such as the telephone number at Modem Support m Set the necessary settings at Modem Support C NET Settings and Connection No for each region When you would like to start the internal processing of PCWAY such as the File Processing Auto Macro Startup and the Sound Startup by the PLC turning ON the relays of each regions it is necessary to have each of the PLC relays perceived as the relay link area M This is possible by using C
267. s used an e mail is sent soon after the e mail sending processing is completed Even if an error occurs while the e mail is being sent the processing Informing relay and Informing event are executed 6 117 Menu bar e File Save Saves the data Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit Saves the data and then completes the registration processing Exit Terminates the registration processing e Edit Copy saved contents Copies the current position No of the cursor Paste saved contents Pastes the data copied in Copy saved contents Cut saved contents Deletes the current position No of the cursor Address Adds a new e mail address to the Address Book Adding a new address to the Address Book e When selecting Address from Edit in the E mail Setting dialog box the following dialog box will appear Then click dd button E mail Setting Address Book xj Name Address Add sei When n button is clicked the following dialog box will appear Enter the necessary information in the Name and Address fields OK Then click button Name Address e Changing the registered address and name Clicking Edit button displays the following dialog box Change the contents in the Name and Address fields Address jaaalbbb co e Deleting the registered address and name Select the registered data address and name that you wish to delete and click
268. setting Next Connection Time in the dialog box that appears After the rotation is completed the event set at Set All Trigger automatically turns off Interrupting the connection To interrupt pause the rotating connection click on the All Settings A button in the Modem Support dialog box and set the Interrupt Trigger When the event set by the Interrupt Trigger turns on all the Sin Trig not yet processed go into the standby state This will not affect PLC that are connected When the event set by the Interrupt Trigger turns off rotating connection resumes Forced termination To forced the termination of the rotating connection click on the All Settings A button in the Modem Support dialog box and set the Terminate Trigger When the event set by the Terminate Trigger turns on all the Sin Trig not yet processed turn off Then the event set by the Terminate Trigger automatically turns off Handling of Connection Errors 1 If the condition of the phone line becomes faulty during connection and the connection is severed or all the connected PLC node numbers become disconnected PCWAY considers it a connection error and severs the connection If this occurs the informing relay at the PLC side remains on 2 By resuming phone line connection processes afterward the informing relay at the PLC side turns off and then on again 4 8 2 2 Reporting of Errors from the PLC Connection from PLCs Operation o
269. settings 14 gt Send file folder 15 gt Sent file folder C Program Files NAIS MEWNET SendMail refer C Program Files NAIS MEWNET SendMail Log refer 1 6 Preservation period of the executed E mail file 2 days 1 7 p I This Checkbox attaches after compressing the attachment file to the own restoring file Server 2 SMTP Enter the server name for outgoing e mails 3 POP3 Enter the server name for incoming e mails Incoming Mail Server 4 Receives the E mail Place a check mark in this check box when e mails are received E mails can be received from the PC and the cellular phone and as a result V Event of PCWAY can be turned ON For details refer to 4 9 4 Inquiry on the Equipment Status from the PC and the Cellular Phone 5 Account name Enter the account name for the e mail used 6 Password Enter the password for the e mail used Operation Preferences 7 Send interval time Enter the interval for checking newly arrived e mails and sending e mails during dial up connection 8 Retries the E mail Place a check mark in this check box when you wish to resend the e mail due to an error E mail is resent at the interval specified in Send interval time above During LAN connection the error e mail is resent while another e mail is sent 9 Delete Retry Data Pressing this button deletes the error e mail when sending e mails Th
270. sheet is updated 8 Inform PLC of phone line disconnection The informing relay set for the PLC at node number 1 is turned off However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Informing Relay PLC node number becomes 0 9 Phone line disconnection Concerning the error informing PLC It is important to be aware of the information given below regarding the error informing PLC 1 Before calling it is necessary to have the RS232C port usage set to Use Serial Data Communication general purpose port Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 After calling make sure to immediately change RS232C port usage to the Perform computer link setting after receiving CONNECT Setting method Set using one of the following methods Programming tool software FP programmer Program inside PLC F144 4 8 3 3 Connecting from a PLC Operation of Phone Line Connection e Place a check in the Receive check box for Network in the Operation Preferences dialog box to allow phone line connection from PLCs e Place a check in the Over 65 Regions check box for Number of regions in the Operation Preferences dialog box The button appears Click on it and perform the requ
271. sks PCBackup bat PCBackup 001 PCBackup 002 files are created When the PCBackup bat PCBackup 001 and PCBackup 002 files are created you will need more than 2 floppy disks Therefore copy PCBackup bat and PCBackup 001 files to the first floppy disk and PCBackup 002 to the 2nd floppy disk In order to decompress the compressed file which you created e When there is only one floppy disk at this point execute PCBackup EXE e When there is more than 2 floppy disks at this point copy all of the files of the floppy disks to the hard disk and then execute PCBackup bat With this the following dialog box is displayed Select the folder which you will decompress to and then execute LZH SFX 2 14 w32 0006 x Install Directory CAPro gram Files PCWA Reference Cancel Item explanations 1 Add The selected file from the middle file list which is contained in the specified drive and folder is displayed at Back Files Delete The file which is selected at the Backup Files area is displayed at the middle file list which is contained in the specified drive and folder Select All All of the files of the middle file list which is contained in the specified drive and the folder is displayed at the Backup Files Delete All All of the files of Backup Files is displayed at the middle file list which is contained in the specified drive and folder OK All of the files of Backup Files is bac
272. ssf sef s7f sef 59 cos Pons eet Seat easy Nest Meet Mery eat eo Bo sg 8 8 8 8 8 ES EOS Bo gw mw mw Bo BB BB BB Be So Be mw Mw BB E e e m a m e e a a a 8 5 Network Type If you have selected MODEM at this drop down list box and also placed a check mark at Permit the Receive check box then click the Seumect tone button and do the settings at this dialog box ey Operation Preferences x Permit the connection Event y El Waiting time Is min Event automatical ly turn on meno ewa _ Event This event is the event which enables the line connection After you have had the line connected from the PLC the connection otherwise disconnection is determined by the on off status of this event Waiting time This is the waiting time for the event to turn on after the PLC lines are connected If this event turns on during the specified time then the line is connected until the event is turned off however if the event does not turn on during this specified time then the line is terminated Event automatically turn on If you placed a check mark here after the line is connected from the PLC the upper event which was specified turns on The line connection condition is continued until this event turns off 3 Error Reception Place a check mark at the Receive check box when you wish to have PCWAY receive the phone call which is called up from remote PLCs Communication Click the BO
273. stalled before you install PCWAY 2 Start Windows operating system 3 Set the PCWAY floppy disk no 1 in to the disk drive and execute setup exe 4 When the program for the installing has started follow the instructions which has been displayed on to the screen J s NoTe Please make sure that you have filled out the form which we have included in the package This will be the user s card Please send this back to our company after you have filled this out 1 5 1 4 Verify the Installing 1 When you have finished the installing procedures the following Groove window will be displayed File Edit View Go Favorites Help e 4X aa Back Fonverd Up Cut Copy Paste Address E CAWINDOWS Start MenutPrograms PEWAY x POWAY PCWAY Help PCWAY Menu Operation Backup Utility Preferences 444 333 iE EEE Modem Connection JE My Computer 2 Start Microsoft Excel and verify whether the PCWAY menu and PCWAY icons have been displayed or not X Microsoft Excel Book1 Eie Edt view Insert Format Tools Data window Help PCWAY lt fercbot ETAIT lelte emmae FET Ea E JOSE SRY snas o e ee A t ala g alla ara 0 B z u SB hls x 83 FE S o A Ad pi Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 ET i m C C e esM Ty Chapter 2 Overview PCWAY 2 1 2 1 PCWAY Memory Area Here we explain about the relay and t
274. t Set Cell Order A e Click E m When you will paste the cell information of the original cell for copying to a certain cell range first set the moving direction which will be prioritized When operating the relay and when changing the register value while the monitor is in RUN then set the continuous moving direction of the cursor The following are the 3 options which determines the direction to move em No Action N Downwards D To The Right R No Action e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A gt No Action N e Click Only the specified cell position will be pasted when performing the pasting of the cell information Downwards e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A gt Downwards D e Click E The data will be pasted atthe cells one by one in the downwards direction when performing the pasting of the cell information To The Right e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Set Cell Order A gt To The Right R e Click The data will be pasted at the cells one by one in the right wards direction when performing the pasting of the cell information 5 6 Run PCWAY e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Run PCWAY D e Click e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift B Start the communication with the PLC When Poway is displayed at the Windows Task bar then PCWAY can be executed and the monitor is ready for use 5 7 Exit PCW
275. t as the following figures n Event Startup OFF gt ON vo OFF gt ON vo OFF gt ON vo By using Event Startup with Auto Macro Startup it is possible to change the chart color etc 4 7 Managing the File 4 7 1 Manage the file with the generation of the accumulating file It is possible to save the PLC information into the file whenever the trigger turns to ON using File Processing of PCWAY It is also possible to back up the accumulated file of the PLC information For further information refer to 4 2 Saving PLC Information into the File e As quoted before PCWAY will handle up to 3 generation files for one file Only the generation 1 file extension 1 can be accumulated in to the file of the PLC information It is possible to either copy or transfer this file to the generation 2 file extension 2 or the generation 3 file extension 3 as well In order to make this possible set the necessary settings at File Processing For further information refer to 6 6 File Processing By accumulating every day data in to the generation 1 file for a month and then transferring generation 1 file to the generation 2 file at the end of the month by doing so generation 1 file will be initialized and generation 2 file will be usable as the prior month s data file Therefore it would be possible to store the current month s data in to generation1 file and the prior month s data in to generation 2 file J s No
276. ta 1 O0msec j Network l Relay Link 1 O0msec Net Type MODEM File Processing 1 O0msec Communication Settings S Macro Startup 1 OOmsec Receive C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No m Error Reception Comments Relay Event r Number of regions E Over 65 Regions Pulse Width Settings Relay ON Time Work Folder 18 Modem Support No Execute C NET No rey Browse WI Connection No E Browse P Single Trigger MV Yes Connection No File E Help H gt C2 iii Comment fo Check node number you want to connect gt Hf BS HH SBS 14 e o 9 kaj H TEGE GEGHI Ei 1s 16 17 18 19 24 Zo 26 27 28 29 mwan 34 3s 36 37 38 39 B r B r F F 44 asf 46f 47 48 49 ba icc SSeS leo F E L m E B B r 58 59 64 es 66 67 68 69 74 37 76 77 78 79 84 ssf s6 87 88 89 m w m m a a a a a m a m m a a a a a TEGE UGGUUI TEGE GGEI m m a a a a a a mE e M 34 ssf 96 97 90 39 2 Place a check mark at the PLC node number which you wish to connect to Do this by left clicking the check box of your desired number from 0 to 99 The number which you have specified here is the connected node number 3 After all of the necessary items for registering is completed save this before you exit Connection No 6 17 Ethernet Remote
277. ted When there are less than 65 PLCs connected Click the Modem Support button and then All Settings to set the Read Register File E Settings C Help H PC Type Refresh Interval Settings PC Type rex PC AT z Display Data 1 O0msec Network i Relay Link l OOmsec Net Type MODEM File Processing l OOmsec Communication Settings S IE Modem Support Ea File E Help H l Permit the E V Receive connection M C NET Con Sin Ong Limited No No No Trig Trig Time min Tel No Relay Event Comments Error Reception i tt a oe a NA Vi No R1 vo 3 3 3 V2 v2 No R2 vo 3 4 4 4 vO vo No RO vo RoE 5 5 5 VO VO No RO vo Over 65 Regions Modem Support i 6 6 6 VO vo No RO vo 77 70 vo No RO vo 8 8 8 vo vo No RO vo m Pulse Width Settings o O 9 9 9 vo vo No RO vo Relay ON Time ah 10 10 10 VO vo No RO vo 11 11 11 VO vo No RO vo 12 12 12 VO vo No RO vo Work Folder C Program Files PCWAY vo vo No IH Modem Support x L n w n v n v RO RO RO vo vo vo RO vo RO vo RO vo x Set All Trigger v C Yes Interrupt Trigger v o I Yes Terminate Trigger v o eg Read Register DT 0 No of Retries j 0 Times Resend Wait Time 90 Sec 90 999 Next Connection Time 90 gee 0 999 seria After reception the PLC data is read with the Read Register that is set Setting the Read Register
278. ter value is computed and is displayed on to the cell with decimal numbers Operation Formula Displays the register value by binary hexadecimal MEW notation only the 1st digit under hexadecimal Recognizes the contents which has been continuously stored in to the register as the character code ASCII code and displays as the character Changes the character and color which will be displayed at the cell at 101 stages by the register value Message The current situation of the PLC relay is displayed Character Change 2 9 2 The memory area of the PLC is changed directly from the Microsoft Excel cell Contents Function registration that is related By double clicking the cell the relay of the PLC is reversed Character Change Level Operation After you double clicked the cell turning the relay of the PLC Character Change to ON after a certain period of time the relay turns to OFF Pulse Operation Operation Formula Double click the cell and turn ON the PLC relay regardless Character Change of the current status Double click the cell and turn OFF the PLC relay Character Change regardless of the current status After you have finished inputting perform an operation and Operation Formula then store in to the register by decimal numbers Store the binary numbers hexadecimal numbers and the MEW notation the 1st digit under is the hexadecimal of which
279. tes result codes in English words changeable EO Does not perform character echo unchangeable S0 1 Means that call signal is issued once unchangeable S2 43 Character used for the escape code changeable The upper AT command is due for standard modems however if the modem which you are using does not match with this then you must verify whether the modem type is suitable for the upper AT command See your modem manual Ethernet Local Not using each link path of MEWNET 1 Example of Hardware lt Ethernet e Max 64 PLCs can be connected Even if using one ET AN unit maximum 63 PLCs can connect That means a personal computer itself must have a node number See detailed explanation in ET LAN Unit Introduction Manual e Connect PLC to HUB via our ET LAN unit or the Ethernet RS232C converter unit on the market When connecting Ethernet RS232C converter unit plug the RS232C cable into TOOL port or COM port of PLCs But connection to FP3 require the Ver 4 4 later converter corresponding to C NET 2 Setting method Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Type of Records O gt Operation Preference D or click the icon in the Tools bar Following Operation Preference dialog box is displayed For select Ethernet Local from network types Click jee under Network Enter required items with selecting Ethernet Local from Network Type EF Operation Preferences x Ethernet Local
280. th this Read Register the first 3 words of the PLC data are read PCWAY reads the PLC with the node number 1 for the Read Register However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word Fixed to the decimal value 1 K1 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 K0 Since the data value of the 2nd word becomes the event number that event is set to ON If it is necessary to inform the PLC of the connection set the informing relay at the MODEM Over 65 Regions The Informing Relay turns on for the PLC with the node number 1 only However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Informing Relay PLC node number becomes 0 Click the Connection No i button and place a check at node number 1 in the Connection No dialog box that appears When co
281. the register value displayed on to the Microsoft Excel cell Module for register With PCWAY we have prepared various modules in order to make your usage of PCWAY program less as possible For further information on this area please refer to Module PCWAY EXE This covers the part which is not visible to the user such as the processing areas file processing timer processing for example or the communication with the PLC This part of the package becomes the core of the program PCWAY EXE must always be running Even if you do not have Microsoft Excel running as long as this module is being runned the logging of the data is possible 2 9 Precautions 2 5 1 Operation Preferences e It is not possible to use the MEWNET H network when you have installed PCWAY with Windows NT Other network types can use it e When using node number 0 it is not possible to use the MEWNET H Ethernet Remote network Also when the network type is C NET or the modem it is not possible to use node number 0 when you are using the C NET adapter for the system And if you use ET LAN unit in Ethernet local Pay attention because Unit No 0 can t use When using C NET or the modem there will not be an error displayed and PCWAY will operate irregularly or an end the program e When there is not much memory area of the personal computer PCWAY might not operate correctly Therefore we recommend the use of the memory area over 32M
282. the extension area the data of PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemory example Dim bWriteFlag 0 To 255 As Byte Dim bStartAddress 0 To 255 As Integer Dim bWriteCount 0 To 255 As Integer Dim lugReturn As Long Dim iLoopcnt As Integer Dim iX As Integer Dim iY As Integer Dim iWriteData 0 To 25599 As Integer For iY 0 To 127 For iX 0 To 199 iWriteData iY 200 iX Val Cells iY 1 iX 1 Next iX Next iY For iLoopent 0 To 255 If iLoopcent 0 Then bWriteFlag iLoopcnt 1 Elself iLoopcnt Mod 2 0 Then bWriteFlag iLoopcnt 1 Else bWriteFlag iLoopcnt 0 End If If bWriteFlag iLoopcnt 1 Then bStartAddress iLoopent 100 bWriteCount iLoopent 200 End lf Next iLoopcnt lugReturn Application Run PCWAYLoggerfncDownLoadMemory 1 1 1 bWriteFlag bStartAddress bWriteCount iWriteData e Upload data from extension area in PLC Ethernet When the bar graph is displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemoryEthernet Argument1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Argument3 As Byte Argument4 As Integer Argument5 As Integer As Long When the bar graph is not displayed during the uploading Function PCWAYLoggerfncUploadMemoryEthernet2 Argument1 As Integer Argument2 As Integer Argument3 As Byte Argument4 As Integer Argument5 As Integer As Long Argumenti PLC Station No Argument2 SLOT No Argument3 Read Flag 0 Not Read 1 Read Argument4 Start Address No 0 1023 Argument5 R
283. the node number for the device 5 Device Set the device which you will turn ON 6 Output Format Select from Pulse or Level When you have chosen V Event at Device you can only specify Level 7 Comment Imputable up to 24 characters Menu bar e File F Save S Saves Export Saves the registered data on the text file CSV format Save and Exit E Saves and finishes the registering procedures Exit X Finishes the registering procedures Registering procedures Do the settings which will specify whether to execute from the overview window or not Click the box on the left side of No If there has been placed a check mark then the execution will be performed In order to do each of the settings first select the row of the No where you would like to do the settings By left clicking the Details command button the details window of Weekly Timer will be displayed Do the necessary settings BE Weekly Timer x File E Help H nE Day Node Device Format Comments PRPRPRPHP PBB BBP BP BBP RPP ee F Details D 6 68 e Details window 1 Place a check mark at Execute when you will execute the registered contents iz No Specified Time Specified Day Node Device Output Format Comments 00 00 Mon Ee Wed Thu f Fri f Sat Sun PageUp U PageDown D Help H 2 Set the time and day when you will have the device turned ON at Specified Time and
284. the sound playing possible For further information refer to 6 13 Sound Startup 4 6 Turn On the Event by the Changing of the Relay Information of the PLC 4 6 1 Watch the changing of the relay With PCWAY it is possible to change the character and the color which you will display later on to the Microsoft Excel cell by the PLC relay turning to ON OFF However the use of this is limited to the displaying only When you would like to use together the changing of the relay ON OFF with other processing it is necessary to follow the matters below 1 You will need a macro for watching the contents of the currently displayed cell 2 In order to start this macro with a certain interval you must register at Interval Timer so that the event will turn ON at a certain interval 3 The registering for Auto Macro Startup which uses this event is necessary Since there are many registering required and various types of processing used together after the registering the processes on the whole will be rather slow In order to make the usage must easier follow the next procedures Turn the event to ON after watching the changing of the relay to on gt off or off gt on Use Event Startup which enables to use this event to have other processing used together Monitoring is carried out an on ongoing basis no matter which spreadsheet is active such as the relay being changes from on to off or from off to on and var
285. ting line from PLCs When receiving define the data register to read information of PLCs First specified data register and subsequent 3 WORDS are read Save following value in PLCs 1 WORD 1 fixed 2 WORD Save the event number turned on after connection hexadecimally When not turning on the event save FFFF H FFFF hexadecimally i e Event No 2F is H 2F 3 WORD Reception for 1 Error Reception for 0 If checked Receive check box at either reception type checked processing is executed irrespective of above values 10 Receive Line Enter a number of lines via which a personal computer can take reception from PLCs This number of lines is required mainly in use of the ISDN line Specify 2 if using two lines of the ISDN line for reception Specify 1 if using one line for former the sending line Be sure to keep following condition Total lines A number of sending line A number of receiving line 11 Reception port No Enter the port number at which a personal computer can take reception from PLCs The port number less than a number of receiving line cause error The port number more than a number of receiving line The port number same with specified number of reception line only is available Setting method Reception Port No 1025 1025 32767 1 Enter the number registered as Reception Port No 2 With clicking gt the setting is displayed in the right field to complete the registration 6 109 Del
286. tings for the data you wish to send For details concerning E mail Setting refer to 6 18 E mail Setting Chapter 5 Operations From the PCWAY Menubar 5 1 Cell Settings e Go to the menu bar gt PCWAY gt Cell Settings S e Click Tl Perform the settings for Cell Settings Target Select from the items listed below Concerning each of the settings refer to 5 1 1 Setting method 1 Relay Displays at real time the ON OFF information of the PLC relay 2 Register Displays at real time based on the PLC register value 3 File Data Displays the file data 4 Event This is the internal relay area of the computer 5 Connection Displays the connection condition of the PLC 6 Connection Settings Does to Disable or Enable the Connection No settings Attribute Read Only Select this when you will have the PLC relay or the register value displayed only at the Microsoft Excel cell the Microsoft Excel cell Read Write Select this when you wish to display the PLC relay or the register value on to the Microsoft Excel cell or when you would like to operate the PLC relay or the register value directly from the cell Write Only Make sure to select this attribute when you would like to specify the area of the data which is displayed on the Microsoft Excel cell and then have this downloaded all at once to the PLC f is not possible to change the PLC register value or to operate the ON OFF of the relay tam
287. tings have been entered click on the Exit E button This closes the screen and returns to the list screen which shows the updated settings To continue entering settings use the PageUp and PageDown buttons to change the number and enter the settings 6 8 Event Startup e Go to the Menu bar PCWAY gt Various Types of Records O gt Event Startup V e Click It is possible to turn the event to ON by the changing of the status ON gt OFF OFF gt ON of relay link area M al Event Startup Joan bs WO NBS BPRPRPRRPRPR HPP BBP RP BPP RPP A ia Event Startup Item explanations 1 Execute Place a check mark when you will execute the selected number Trigger Set the number of the relay link area which watches the changing of the status C NET No This will be displayed only when the Network Type of Operation preferences is Modem Set the C NET No which has already been set at C NET Settings After clicking the Browse command button the C NET Settings window will be displayed With this by going to File gt Select current No and finish it is also possible to choose from here Start Condition Select when to turn the informing event to ON when the relay link which is set at Trigger goes from OFF gt ON or ON gt OFF Informing Event Set the event which you would like to turn ON at the upper Start condition Initialize by sheet name Check this if
288. trigger it is possible to perform the file processing at various timings For instance e By turning the event to on at a certain interval Interval Timer the file processing will also be performed at a certain interval e By turning the event to on at a specified time and date Weekly Timer the file processing will also be performed at a specified time and date e When Number in Production has reached its goal number turn the relay link to on with the PLC Create the program and perform the file processing using the relay link as the trigger Such performances are possible For further information on each of the registering refer to 6 9 Weekly Timer and 6 10 Interval Timer A File processing using the link relay as the trigger In order to turn the link relay to on at the PLC it is necessary to do the programming at the PLC so that the relay link which becomes the trigger will self hold itself With this it is possible for PCWAY to recognize that the relay link has turned to on The informing relay is there for you to cancel the self hold M EXAMPLE For the file processings of linkrelay LO and informing relay RO e Preconditions It is necessary to have PCWAY recognize the link relay LO as the relay link MO For MEWNET H use the MEWNET H setting software independently sold For C NET or the Modem refer to 6 11 C NET Settings e The program for the PLC LO x0 RO HDF HH LO With th
289. ubRunStart Sub PCWAYsubRunStop Sub PCWAYsubDownLoad Sub PCWAYsubRefresh Sub PCWAYsubRefreshNoMessage e Update Active Sheet Data with message Sub PCWAYsubSheetRefresh e Update Sheet Data without message Sub PCWAYsubSheetRefreshNoMessage Argument 1 as String Argument1 Sheet name that renews information In the case that argument 1 was omitted or in the case that was specified the active sheet is renewed Example Renews the information of Sheet no 2 Call Application Run PCWAYsubSheetRefreshNoMessage Sheet2 e Save Microsoft Excel File fixed File name Present file name YYMMDDHHMMSS Sub PCWAYsubFileSave e Save Microsoft Excel File possible to specify file name Function PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType_ Argument 1 as String Argument 2 as Integer As String Argumenti Specified file name File expansion xls is not included When you registered only the file name the HTML file is saved to the same folder as the Microsoft Excel book file Argument2 0 Saves the original book 1 Original book is not saved It is O in the case of omission Return value File name which was saved Folder name accompaniment Example The name called TEST is attached when saving the present book The original book is not saved Dim strFilename as String strFilename Application Run PCWAYfncFileSaveNameType TEST 1 PR e Save HTML File fixed File name Present file name Sub PCWAYsubHTMLFileSave e Save HT
290. un gt Method Only specified gt Digits after decimal point 2 gt d Type Comment Date file access date sss SsS Time _ File access time 0 Integer or number in productim S Integer _ for number of defects sss Real nun tor devect rate File Name test When planning to create a file at the folder besides the work folder input at the folder and file name Write Mode Insert at end of file The record at the very most end is the newest data Treatment when file data is full Continue processing Always saves the 100 of the most updated records Digits after decimal point 2 The defects rate is saved to two digits to the right of the decimal point After the finishing registering select Save option at the pull down menu list of File of the menu bar Registering the file processing The target to be read from the data stored in a file the processing timing and other items are stored using File Processing For further information on each of the items and the registering methods refer to 6 6 File Processing Run File Processing and register the following settings as Execution No 1 kA File Processing File E Edit E Field Copy C Help H Execution no 1 Collection of production data gt Comment fcol1ection of production data Execute Specify corresponding file Vv ver File uo l Production File z Reference Filename test Record quantity 100 Write mode Jinsere at begin
291. ut C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color LL iia Ot nu background color 3 To add a color to the text and background after the text has been input either select the display color editing function and then select the text color and background color or directly select the text color or background color which automatically switches to the editing function Click with the left button of the mouse for the Message column where text has been input to change the selected display color File E Edit E Help H No 1 Machine Condition gt Comment Machine Condition Data value Message off iE ee pt 2 C Edit display color Select color Background color Yes No Select character color eee Select background color EHEHEHE 4 When all of the inputting has been completed finish the registering procedures by going to the menu bar gt File gt Save gt Edit or to Select current No and finish However Select current No and finish is selectable only when you have registered from the Message dialog box of the Cell Settings dialog box enter this with the command button The currently displayed number will be also displayed at Message No at the Cell Settings dialog box x File E Edit E Help H Save and Exit E Exit C Character i
292. ven when the relay or the register value of the PLC is changed 5 11 Download Data It is possible to download the cell data with one of the methods below e Go to the menu bar PCWAY gt Download Data E e Click me e Shortcut key Ctrl Shift G For the cells of which the Attribute has been specified as Write Only in Cell Settings it is possible to specify the cell area and download the contents of the cell to the PLC a orte When the Target at Cell Settings is Relay Input 1 into the cell when wanting to put to on Input 0 into the cell when wanting to put to off e In the case when you have chosen Level Operation with the operation method of Cell Settings By inputting 1 into the cell the corresponding relay will turn to on after the downloading By inputting 0 into the cell the corresponding relay will turn to off after the downloading e In the case when you have chosen Pulse Operation with the operation method of Cell Settings By inputting 1 into the cell after the corresponding relay turns to on after the downloading the relay will turn to off after a certain period of time default 500ms By inputting 0 into the cell there will be no operating taking place e In the case when you have chosen ON Operation with the operation method of Cell Settings Not relating by the value of the cell the corresponding relay turns to ON after the downloading e In the case when y
293. ver 65 Regions dialog box EE Operation Preferences x m MODEM Over 65 Regions Informing Relay Informing Event V Inform y 0 Read Register Node l DT 0 Connection No P emco mw At this dialog box set the Read Register and with this Read Register the first 3 words of the PLC data are read PCWAY reads the PLC with the node number 1 for the Read Register However if there is a check in the Use Link unit No when connection by RS232C check box in the dialog box brought up by selecting Option O from the Settings C menu of the Operation Preferences dialog box the Read Register PLC node number becomes 0 At the PLC it is necessary to store the values given below 1st word Fixed to the decimal value 1 K1 2nd word The event number that you want to turn on during phone line connection is stored as a hexadecimal number if the event number is 2F store H2F If there is no event number that you want to turn on then store H FFFF 3rd word Fixed to the decimal value 0 KO The data value stored in the 2nd word becomes the event number and that event is set to ON Furthermore only the files that are triggered by that event are executed Once they are completed the connection is severed immediately You cannot inform the PLC of the connection The registering of the informing relay becomes invalid 4 8 2 When Thereare Less Than 65 Remote Regions Remove the c
294. ware To setup the system so that the internal processing of the PCWAY functions such as File Processing Auto Macro Startup and Sound Startup is booted when the PLC turns on the relay the C NET Settings of the PCWAY must be used to recognize the various PLC relays as the relay link area M m By setting C NET Settings the PLC internal relay R will be set as the relay link area When the PLC type is FP3 FP C FP10OSH it is possible to set the link area L also C NET C NET C NET C NET Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 When connected as the figure above set at C NET Settings as the example introduced to you below EE C NET Settings File F Help H Comment Comment Setting range Execute Relay link range PCWAY notation C yo Node 1 WRO UR1 hro firir B rai Yes Node 1 x ve gt 0 From 2 7 Word AMIF 1R0 Fimo fia ce Node 2 je o From 1 7 Word fmo finer C No Node 3 WRO WR1 Bro Brr Node 3 gt j o From 2 Word fma S fm E C Yes wode 12 From Elua f go Node 17 jef o From 1 7 Word m ai For further details refer to 6 11 C NET Settings Setting Operation Preferences Run Operation Preferences and set the information introduced to you below Click on the Sa button under Network Select C NET RS232C under Network Type Enter the correct settings for the COM Port Baud Rate Data Length Stop Bit an
295. y doing the registering at C NET Settings J s NoTe When the network type is MEWNET H the registered contents at C NET Settings will no longer be valid e When using the modem network type As the same as the upper C NET RS 232C when using C NET Settings to set a similar relay link area it is necessary to use the C NET No adapted to each of the Modem Support registering 8 Other relays It is not possible to use the P Pulse Relay or the E Error Informing Relay with PCWAY Summary Relay READ WRITE Use as Trigger X External Input relay A N A N A Y External output relay A A N A R Internal relay A A N A R Special internal relay A N A N A T Timer A N A N A C Counter A N A N A L link relay A A N A M Relay link area A N A A P Pulse relay N A N A N A E Error informing relay N A N A N A If the network type is MEWNET H the timer and counter are not able to do A Available N A Not available READ 2 3 2 1 2 Explanation on the Register With PCWAY the memory area of below is expressed as the Register It is possible to change the contents of what will be displayed on to the Microsoft Excel cell by the value and the character code which has been stored inside the register Whether it is possible to use a certain memory area and the memory area range which can be used varies by the PLC type 1 DT Data register Possible to Read a
296. y link area which has been set using the MEWNET H Setting Software Independently sold e When using C NET RS 232C network type You must make sure to have the area which will be used as the relay link registered at C NET Settings The relay which can be specified as the link relay is either the R internal relay or the L link relay e When using the Modem network type It is necessary to have the area which will be used as the relay link registered based on the networks connected to each of the PLCs It is crucial to register this at C NET Settings The relay which can be specified as the link relay is the R internal relay or the L link relay e When using no network The relay link area cannot be used as the trigger e When using Ethernet network type You must make sure to have the area which will be used as the relay link registered at C NET Settings The relay which can be specified as the relay link is either the R internal relay or L Link relay Definition of Informing The word informing has been adopted for use to describe that each of the internal processing which have started due to the trigger have completed Use this trigger to perform handshakes with the PLC or start each of the internal processing consecutively Example of Handshaking Performances with the PLC by the Trigger and the Informing Relay When the trigger is the relay link area M Here we explain about this using the network type of
297. you have inputted in to the register The character which you have inputted is stored in to the register as the ASCII code Downloads all at once the contents of the cells of which the Download Data range has been specified to the PLC 3 Save the PLC data in to the file or display the saved data Contents Function registration that is related PCWAY saves the PLC data in to the file at optional timings File Master by the trigger from the PLC File Processing PCWAY saves the PLC data in to the file at regular intervals Interval Timer File Master File Processing PCWAY saves the PLC data in to the file at the specified Weekly Timer time of the specified date File Master File Processing Displays the saved file data on to Microsoft Excel File Master Saves as the Microsoft Excel book Save Excel File Saving Microsoft Excel books as HTML Save HTML File e The saving of the PLC data in to the file performs independent to the running of Microsoft Excel e The data which has been saved is CSV format Therefore the displaying of the data at a different application besides Microsoft Excel is possible e There are 2 optional selections in all at the displaying of the formerly saved file data on to Microsoft Excel Update file contents each time and Do not update 4 Others Contents Function registration that is related Turn ON the PLC relay and the
298. ypes the event Operation Formula for the register 100 types The registered message which changes by the 100 types 4097 stages types File Master Maximum record number Maximum field number 600 types 30000 records 256 field records Generation 3 generations files File Processing File Trigger 2000 types Event Startup 1000 types Weekly Timer 100 types Interval Timer 100 types Auto Macro Startup 1000 types Sound Startup 1000 types Modem Support 64 types 64 areas Modem Connection 4096 regions Application Startup 100 types Ethernet Remote 254 types E mail Setting 100 types Maximum number of PLC to connect 254 units However this relies on the maximum number which can be connected for the network type Layer number of the MEWNET link Only one layer After the 2nd layer invalid J s NoTe For the differences in modem response registration and modem connections please refer to section Modem Up To 64 Remote Regions and section Modem Over 65 Remote Regions 2 4 Module PCWAY is made up of 3 modules in all Add In Software Displays the PLC relay and register values on to the Microsoft Excel cell or downloads data which has been entered in to the cell to the PLC This covers the visual performances such as the displaying of the data It is necessary to have PCWAY EXE of below running in order to have the PLC relay or

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

JVC TM-2001U 20" TV  スライド 1  412KB  Samsung CW-21Z403N User Manual  Interaction esprit matiere sur les corps solides  Aiphone GF-VBC GF-1D User's Manual  Technaxx 302P  Fiche boat (F)_11.13.indd    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file